0% found this document useful (0 votes)
10 views

Lsmcua

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
10 views

Lsmcua

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 310

Laser Scan Micrometer

<Controller>

LSM-CU-A

User's Manual
- Instructions for use -
Read this document thoroughly before operating
the product. After reading, retain it close at hand for
future reference.
This English language version of the document
contains the original instructions.

No. 99MBC150A
● For the reading order of the related
Date of publication: June 1, 2023 (1)
User's Manuals, see "■ Positioning of this
document, document map" on page 4.
*99MBC150A*
■ Product names and model numbers covered in this document
Product name Model number
Laser Scan Micrometer <Controller> LSM-CU-A

■ Notice regarding this document


y Mitutoyo Corporation assumes no responsibilities for any damage to the product, caused by its use
not conforming to the procedure described in this document.
y Upon loan or transfer of this product, be sure to attach this document to the product.
y In the event of loss or damage to this document, immediately contact the agent where you pur-
chased the product or a Mitutoyo sales office.
y Read this document thoroughly before operating the product. In particular, be sure to fully under-
stand "Safety Precautions" on page 8 and "Precautions for Use" on page 10.
y The contents of this document are based on information current as of June 2023.
y No part or whole of this document may be transmitted or reproduced by any means without prior
written permission of Mitutoyo Corporation.
y Some screen displays in this document may be highlighted, simplified or partially omitted for con-
venience of explanation. In addition, some of them may differ from actual ones to the extent that no
user will misunderstand the functions and operations.
y The corporation, organization and product names that appear in this document are their trade-
marks or registered trademarks.
©2023 Mitutoyo Corporation. All rights reserved.

No. 99MBC150A
Mitutoyo Software End User License Agreement

■ IMPORTANT
PLEASE READ THIS MITUTOYO SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") CARE-
FULLY BEFORE USING THE MITUTOYO SOFTWARE PRODUCTS. THIS EULA SHALL CONSTI-
TUTE A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU/CUSTOMER AND MITUTOYO CORPORATION ("MI-
TUTOYO") FOR THE MITUTOYO SOFTWARE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED WITH THIS EULA, WHICH
SOFTWARE PRODUCT INCLUDES, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMPUTER PROGRAM AND MAY
ALSO INCLUDE ASSOCIATED MEDIA, PROGRAM DISK(S), DONGLES, MANUALS, OTHER PRINT-
ED MATERIALS, AND/OR OTHER "ONLINE" OR ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION (COLLECTIVELY,
"SOFTWARE PRODUCT"). BY CLICKING ON THE "ACCEPT" BUTTON, OPENING THE PACKAGE,
DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT, INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT ON AND/
OR USING A PRODUCT OR PROGRAM CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT, YOU ARE
DEEMED TO HAVE CONSENTED TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA, DO NOT CLICK ON THE "AC-
CEPT" BUTTON AND DO NOT OPEN, DOWNLOAD, INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT.
THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS LICENSED, NOT SOLD, SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDI-
TIONS SET FORTH IN THIS EULA. THE GRANT OF LICENSE SET FORTH BELOW WILL BE EF-
FECTIVE ONLY WHEN YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS EULA.

■ License
Mitutoyo grants to you/customer ("Customer") a non-transferable and non-exclusive and limited license
to install and use one copy of the Software Product (in object code form only) on a single computer
system, under the terms and conditions of this EULA. In the event that Customer wishes to use the Soft-
ware Product on another computer, Customer must obtain another license therefor.
Customer acknowledges and agrees that (a) Mitutoyo, its affiliated and related companies and/or its
suppliers are and shall remain the owner of the exclusive right, title and interest in and to the Software
Product and (b) Customer has no right, title or interest of any nature whatsoever in and to the Software
Product, except the right to use the Software Product in accordance with and subject to the terms and
conditions of this EULA. All rights not expressly granted herein by Mitutoyo are reserved by Mitutoyo
for the exclusive benefit and use of Mitutoyo and its affiliated and related companies as Mitutoyo deems
appropriate.

■ Restrictions
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED HEREIN, CUSTOMER SHALL NOT PRINT OR COPY, IN
WHOLE OR IN PART, THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT; MODIFY THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT; RE-
VERSE COMPILE OR REVERSE ASSEMBLE/ENGINEER ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE SOFT-
WARE PRODUCT; OR RENT, LEASE, SUBLICENSE, DISTRIBUTE, SELL, OR CREATE DERIVATIVE
WORKS OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT.

Customer may permanently transfer all of its rights under this EULA and the Software Product, on the
conditions that (a) Customer notifies Mitutoyo of its intention of transfer prior to such transfer; (b) Cus-
tomer retains no copies thereof, (c) Customer transfers all of the Software Product (including all compo-
nent parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA, and, if applicable, the Certificate
of Authenticity) to the transferee and (d) the transferee agrees to abide by all of the terms of this EULA.
If the Software Product is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the Software Prod-
uct and all of Customer's rights therein, if any.

1 No. 99MBC150A
■ Copyright
Copyright in and to the Software Product shall remain exclusively with Mitutoyo, its affiliated and related
companies and/or its suppliers. Customer may not remove, modify or alter any copyright, trademark or
any other intellectual property legend/notice from any part of the Software Product.

■ Limited warranty
If Customer discovers a physical defect in the media on which the Software Product is distributed, or in
a documentation of the Software Product within one year from the date of original purchase by Custom-
er, Mitutoyo will replace the media or documentation free of charge. Except for the foregoing, the Soft-
ware Product is provided "AS IS"; provided however, that if a malfunction which Mitutoyo judges as fatal
defect affecting an intended material performance or functions of the Software Product within one year
from the date of original purchase by Customer, Mitutoyo will at its option repair such defect or provide
replacement software. The remedy by this limited warranty extends only to Customer as the original
licensee and does not extend to the transferee. Customer's exclusive remedy and the entire liability of
Mitutoyo, its affiliated and related companies and its suppliers under this limited warranty will be limited,
at Mitutoyo's sole and exclusive option, only to the repair or replacement as aforesaid. In no event does
Mitutoyo warrant that the Software Product is error free or that Customer will be able to operate the
Software Product without problems or interruptions or that the Software Product will work in combina-
tion with any hardware or application software products provided by third parties.
This warranty does not apply if the Software Product or any component or element thereof (or the equip-
ment upon which such Software Product is intended to operate) (a) has been altered or modified, (b) has
not been installed, operated, repaired, or maintained in accordance with instructions supplied by Mitu-
toyo, (c) has been subjected to abnormal physical or electrical stress, misuse, negligence, or accident,
or (d) is used in ultra-hazardous activities.
Any warranty provided by Mitutoyo or its affiliated companies relative to the equipment/hardware upon
which the Software Product is installed shall not expand, extend or otherwise modify the limited warran-
ty set forth herein or provide any rights to Customer which are not otherwise expressly set forth herein.

EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THIS WARRANTY, ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REP-


RESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OR WARRANTY ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, US-
AGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY
APPLICABLE LAW.
Customer assumes all responsibility for all results arising out of its selection of the Software Product to
achieve its intended results.

■ Disclaimer
IN NO EVENT WILL MITUTOYO, ITS AFFILIATED AND RELATED COMPANIES AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT, OR DATA, OR FOR SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARD-
LESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE OF
THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT EVEN IF MITUTOYO, ITS AFFILIATED AND RELATED COMPANIES
AND/OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
If, notwithstanding the other provisions of this EULA, Mitutoyo, its affiliated and related companies and/
or its suppliers are found to be liable to Customer for any damage or loss which arises out of or is in any
way connected with use of the Software Product by Customer, in no event shall Mitutoyo's and/or its
affiliated and related companies' and suppliers' liability to Customer, whether in contract, tort (including
negligence), or otherwise, exceed the price paid by Customer for the Software Product only.
The foregoing limitations shall apply even if the above-stated warranty fails of its essential purpose.
BECAUSE SOME COUNTRIES, STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
OR THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, IN SUCH
COUNTRIES, STATES OR JURISDICTIONS, MITUTOYO'S, ITS AFFILIATED AND RELATED COMPA-
NIES' AND SUPPLIERS' LIABILITY SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW.

2 No. 99MBC150A
■ Termination
The license of Customer under this EULA is effective until terminated. Customer may terminate this
EULA at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Product including all media and documenta-
tion. This EULA will terminate immediately without notice from Mitutoyo if Customer fails to comply with
any provision of this EULA. Upon termination, Customer must destroy all copies of Software Product
including all media and documentation.

■ Export control
The Software Product is subject to Japanese export control laws as well as any other applicable export
or import control laws and regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all
such applicable regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export,
re-export, or import the Software Product.

■ Miscellaneous
This EULA shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan, without giving
effect to the principles of conflict of law. Customer agrees to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
district courts in Tokyo, Japan with respect to any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or relating
to this EULA and the parties respective rights and obligations hereunder. This EULA shall not be gov-
erned by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the applica-
tion which is expressly excluded.
If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this EULA shall
remain in full force and effect.
This EULA constitutes the entire agreement between Customer and Mitutoyo with respect to the subject
matter hereof.
Customer shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Mitutoyo, its affiliated and related companies and
its suppliers from and against any and all claims and liability of any nature whatsoever arising out of or
in connection with Customer's breach of this EULA.
The governing language of this EULA shall be English. English version will prevail to the extent that
there is any inconsistency between English version and any version translated into another language.

3 No. 99MBC150A
About This Document

■ Positioning of this document, document map


This describes the positioning of this document and its relationship with other installments.

Describes use of LSMPAK to set up and operate the


Laser Scan Micrometer controller of the Laser Scan Micrometer.
<Controller>
User's Manual (This document)

Describes the sensor of the Laser Scan Micrometer,


Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor>
including how to connect it to the controller and its
User's Manual
specifications.

Describes the IF module for EtherNet/IP (optional


IF Module <EtherNet/IP>
accessory) to be attached to the controller of the Laser
(Optional accessory)
Scan Micrometer, including its attachment to the con-
User's Manual
troller and specifications.

Describes the PROFINET IF module (optional acces-


IF Module <PROFINET>
sory) that is mounted on the controller of the Laser
(Optional accessory)
Scan Micrometer, including its attachment to the con-
User's Manual
troller and specifications.

Describes the IF module for EtherCAT (optional ac-


IF Module <EtherCAT>
cessory) that is mounted on the controller of the Laser
(Optional accessory)
Scan Micrometer, including its attachment to the con-
User's Manual
troller and specifications.

Describes the IF module for CC-Link IE TSN (optional


IF Module <CC-Link IE TSN>
accessory) that is mounted on the controller of the
(Optional accessory)
Laser Scan Micrometer, including its attachment to the
User's Manual
controller and specifications.

■ Intended readers and purpose of this document

● Intended readers
This document is intended for operators and administrators of the Laser Scan Micrometer.
The readers are assumed to have been familiar with basic operations on a PC and Windows.
They are also assumed to be able to understand individual instructions by reading the described draw-
ings.

● Purpose
The purpose of this document is to help you to understand the functional overview of the product, the
functions of each part, the non-contact type sensor using a laser beam, operation procedures, and
maintenance details.

4 No. 99MBC150A
Conventions Used in This Document

■ Safety reminder conventions warning against potential hazards

DANGER Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.

Electricity
Alerts the user to a specific hazardous situation that means "Caution, risk of
electric shock".
Optical radiation
Alerts the user to a specific hazardous situation that means "Caution, risk of
high-intensity light".

■ Conventions indicating prohibited and mandatory actions

Indicates concrete information about prohibited actions.

Indicates concrete information about mandatory actions.

Indicates that grounding needs to be implemented.

■ Conventions indicating referential information or reference location

IMPORTANT Indicates information that must be known when using the product.

Indicates further information and details relevant for the operating methods
Tips
and procedures that are explained in that section.

Indicates reference location if there is information that should be referred to in


this document or an extraneous User's Manual.
Example: For details about XX, see "■ What to do if a dialog box appears
at startup" on page C-4 in "PART B Preparation".

5 No. 99MBC150A
■ Other conventions

Represent a paraphrase of an immediately preceding phrase or a supplemen-


( ): Round brackets
tary explanation.

Represent a highlighted phrase. They also indicate an index where information


" ": Double quotation marks
to be referenced is described.

Represent a menu name on the screen, screen name, dialog name, button,
[ ]: Square brackets display item, tab name, or key on the keyboard. They also indicate an item to
be purposely entered or selected by the customer.

1, 2, 3… Indicates the order and the contents of tasks.


1, 2, 3… ( 1 : indicates main tasks, 1: indicates detailed tasks)

» Indicates the action resulted from some operation(s).

6 No. 99MBC150A
■ Example of conventions use

PART B : 2 Setup

2.1.4 I/O Device Connection (if Required)


Connect this product to an I/O device using the I/O terminal block.
Indicates safety information.
CAUTION
Check that the power to both this product and the I/O device is off, and then connect this product to
the I/O device.
Working with this product and I/O equipment while they are energized may result in electric shock. Indicates supplementary informa-
tion.
Tips
• The user is responsible for supplying an I/O cable. Indicates reference to some other
• For details on I/O connectors, see
"PART D Interfaces".
"3.1.1 Terminal Block Connector Specifications" on page D-23 in
document or section.

I/O device

Indicates an operating procedure to


1 Press a flathead screwdriver against the flathead screwdriver slot on the terminal block socket. be performed or its outline.

Slot for flathead screwdriver

B-7 No. 99MBC150A

7 No. 99MBC150A
Safety Precautions
Read these "Safety Precautions" thoroughly before operating the product to use it properly.
These safety precautions include such information as to prevent injury to the operator and other per-
sons, damage to property and product defects. Be sure to observe these precautions carefully.

■ Precautions for this product

DANGER
To prevent electric shocks, strictly observe the following.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shocks or burns, or in some cases death.

• When mounting external devices or optional accessories, turn off the power to the device.
• Ensure that the product is properly grounded.
• Halt the system in case of a malfunction.
• Do not disassemble this product or remove its cover.
There is a risk of electric shock or burns, and in some cases, death or serious injury. In addition,
there is a risk of accidents due to intrusion of material such as metal powder.
• Do not touch the connection terminals with your hands or objects in order to prevent electric shocks
due to connection faults.

NOTICE
Securely connect the connectors of the connecting cables for noise isolation.

Tips
Even if an error is displayed while measuring, it does not necessarily indicate a malfunction.
See "PART F Troubleshooting" on page F-i to check the cause and solution.

8 No. 99MBC150A
■ Precautions for the sensor used with this product

CAUTION
The sensor that is connected to this product uses a visible-light laser beam. Handling this product or sensor in
a manner not described in this manual or the "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor> User's Manual" may result
in dangerous light exposure.
This product is a "Class 1 laser product" under IEC standard "IEC 60825-1", the safety standard for laser equip-
ment.

• Under no circumstances should you ever remove the laser beam class indicator label attached to
the sensor body. Display labels are required warn of the need for caution.

• Do not look into the laser beam-emitting port. Absolutely do not look into the laser beam-emitting
port even when no light is being emitted.
• Do not look directly at the laser beam with optical equipment (things which converge light such as
magnifying glasses, etc.). In addition, do not allow the light reflected from the flat surfaces to enter
into your eyes, when measuring flat surfaces such as mirror surface. Even if the beam hits your
skin, it will not particularly be a problem.

Tips
Even if the beam hits your skin, it will not particularly be a problem.

9 No. 99MBC150A
Precautions for Use

■ Use and handling of the product

● Use this product only by connecting to measuring instruments which supports this
product.
Do not use this product for measuring instruments which does not support this product.
For measuring instruments supported by this product, see "2.1 Launching LSMPAK" on page C-3 in
"PART C Operation".

● This product is for industrial usage.


Do not use this product for purposes other than for industrial usage.

● This product is a precision instrument.


y Do not subject the product to drastic shocks such as dropping it, or exert excessive force upon it.
y Do not disassemble or modify the product.

If the product is used beyond the conditions indicated in the specifications ( "1 Specifications" on
page G-1 in "PART G Appendix"), be aware that the functions and performance cannot be guaranteed.

10 No. 99MBC150A
■ Environment for placement
This product is a precision electronic instrument and is designed for indoor use. To obtain the highest
accuracy, take into account the following conditions when installing the product. Mitutoyo assumes no
responsibility for accidents or failures that result from disregarding the following items.
Use the product in the following places.
y Where there is minimal dust and grit
Dust or grit in the usage area will adversely affect the mechanical and electronic components
inside the product.
y Where there are minimal vibrations
If the product is going to be used in places where there are lots of vibrations, problems will be
generated in the precision components being used, which will cause measuring performance to be
impaired.
If use in a place with vibrations is inevitable, take measures to reduce vibrations, such as laying an
anti-vibration rubber mat under the product.
y Where the ambient temperature is from 0 °C through 50 °C
y Where the humidity is from 20 % RH through 85 % RH (without condensation)
y Where the altitude is 2000 m or lower
If the product is used in places where the altitude exceeds 2000 m, it will cause measuring perfor-
mance to be impaired.

Do not use or store the product in the following places where the temperature and humidity drastically
fluctuate, because the product's functions and measurement results will be adversely affected and it will
cause malfunction.
y Where exposed to direct sunlight
If installing this product in a place exposed to direct sunlight, such as near a window, is inevitable,
take measures to shade the product from the sun, such as using a curtain.
y Where extremely hot or cold

y Where there are risks of getting wet

Tips
This product does not conform to the International Protection standard (IP standard). Sensors (LSM-02-A and
LSM-30-A) are IP67 rated.

■ Warming-up

IMPORTANT
To achieve measurements with a consistent accuracy, allow the product to warm up for about 30 minutes to an
hour after you turn on the power to the product.

■ Maintenance
For the maintenance of this product, see "2 Cleaning" on page E-3 in "PART E Inspection and
Maintenance".

11 No. 99MBC150A
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
This product complies with the EMC Directive and the UK Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations;
however, if this receives electromagnetic interference that exceeds these requirements, it will be out of
warranty and require appropriate measures.
This product is an industrial product, and is not intended to be used in residential environment. If this
product is used in residential environment, this product may cause electromagnetic interference with
other instruments. In such a case, it is required to take appropriate measures for preventing such elec-
tromagnetic interference.

Export Control Compliance


This product falls into the Catch-All-Controlled Goods and/or Catch-All-Controlled Technologies (includ-
ing Programs) under Category 16 of Appended Table 1 of Export Trade Control Order or under Catego-
ry 16 of Appended Table of Foreign Exchange Control Order, based on Foreign Exchange and Foreign
Trade Act of Japan.
If you intend re-export of the product from a country other than Japan, re-sale of the product in a coun-
try other than Japan, or re-providing of the technology (including Programs), you shall observe the
regulations of your country.
Also, if an option is added or modified to add a function to this product, this product may fall under the
category of List-Control Goods, List-Control Technology (including Programs) under Category 1 - 15
of Appended Table 1 of Export Trade Control Order or under Category 1 - 15 of Appended Table of
Foreign Exchange Control Order, based on Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Act of Japan. In that
case, if you intend re-export of the product from a country other than Japan, re-sale of the product in a
country other than Japan, or re-providing of the technology (including Programs), you shall observe the
regulations of your country. Please contact Mitutoyo in advance.

Notes on Export to European Countries


When you intend exporting of this product to any of the European countries, it may be required to pro-
vide User's Manual(s) in English and Declaration of Conformity in English (in some cases, the official
language of the country to be exported). For detailed information, please contact Mitutoyo in advance.

Disposal of Products outside the European Countries


Please follow the official instruction in each community and country.

12 No. 99MBC150A
Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Appli-
cable in the European Countries with Separate Collection
Systems)
This symbol on the product or on its packaging is based on WEEE Directive (Directive on Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment), and this symbol indicates that this product shall not be
treated as household waste.
To reduce the environmental impact and minimize the volume of landfills, please cooperate in
reuse and recycle.
For how to dispose of the product, please contact the agent where you purchased the product or
a Mitutoyo sales office.

China RoHS Compliance Information


This product meets China RoHS requirements. See the table below.

产品中有害物质的名称及含量

有害物质
部件名称 铅 汞 镉 六价铬 多溴联苯 多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
本体 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
电气设备部分 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
配件 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

本表格依据 SJ/T 11364 的规定编制。


○:表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求以下。
×:表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求。

环保使用期限标识是根据《电器电子产品有害物质限制使用管理办法》以及《电子电气产品有害
物质限制使用标识要求(SJ/T11364-2014)》制定的,适用于中国境内销售的电子电气产品的标识。
电器电子产品只要按照安全及使用说明内容在正常使用情况下,从生产日期算起,在此期限内产品
中含有的有毒有害物质不致发生外泄或突变,不致对环境造成严重污染或对其人身、财产造成严
重损害。
产品使用后,要废弃在环保使用年限内或者刚到年限的产品,请根据国家标准采取适当的方法进
行处置。
另外,此期限不同于质量/功能的保证期限。

13 No. 99MBC150A
Warranty
This product has been manufactured under strict quality management, but should it develop problems
within one year of the date of purchase in normal use, repair shall be performed free of charge. Please
contact the agent where you purchased the product or Mitutoyo sales representative ( "SERVICE
NETWORK" on page App-1). This warranty, however, shall not affect any provisions of the Mitutoyo Soft-
ware End User License Agreement.

If this product fails or is damaged for any of the following reasons, it will be subject to a repair charge,
even if it is still under warranty.

y Failure or damage owing to fair wear and tear


y Failure or damage owing to inappropriate handling, maintenance or repair, or to unauthorized mod-
ification
y Failure or damage owing to transport, dropping, or relocation of the product after purchase
y Failure or damage owing to fire, salt, gas, abnormal voltage, lightning surge, or natural disaster
y Failure or damage owing to use in combination with hardware or software other than those desig-
nated or permitted by Mitutoyo
y Failure or damage owing to use in ultra-hazardous activities

This warranty is effective only where the product is properly installed and operated in conformance with
the instructions in this document within the original country of the installation.

EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THIS WARRANTY, ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REP-


RESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OR WARRANTY ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, US-
AGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY
APPLICABLE LAW.
You assume responsibility for all results due to the selection of this product to achieve your intended
results.

Disclaimer
IN NO EVENT WILL MITUTOYO, ITS AFFILIATED AND RELATED COMPANIES AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT, OR DATA, OR FOR SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARD-
LESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS
PRODUCT EVEN IF MITUTOYO OR ITS AFFILIATED AND RELATED COMPANIES AND/OR SUPPLI-
ERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

If, notwithstanding the foregoing, Mitutoyo is found to be liable to you for any damage or loss which
arises out of or is in any way connected with use of this product by you, in no event shall Mitutoyo's and/
or its affiliated and related companies' and suppliers' liability to you, whether in contract, tort (including
negligence), or otherwise, exceed the price paid by you for the product only.

The foregoing limitations shall apply even if the above-stated warranty fails of its essential purpose.
BECAUSE SOME COUNTRIES, STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
OR THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, IN SUCH
COUNTRIES, STATES OR JURISDICTIONS, MITUTOYO'S LIABILITY SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW.

14 No. 99MBC150A
Third Party Licenses
Prism.Core
https://github.com/PrismLibrary/Prism

The MIT License (MIT)

Copyright (c) Prism Library

All rights reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial por-
tions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFT-
WARE.

ReactiveProperty
https://github.com/runceel/ReactiveProperty

runceel/ReactiveProperty is licensed under the MIT License

A short and simple permissive license with conditions only requiring preservation of copyright and li-
cense notices. Licensed works, modifications, and larger works may be distributed under different terms
and without source code.

Permissions Limitations Conditions


Commercial use Liability License and copyright notice
Distribution Warranty
Modification
Private use

The MIT License (MIT)

Copyright (c) 2018 neuecc, xin9le, okazuki

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and asso-
ciated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial por-
tions of the Software.

15 No. 99MBC150A
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFT-
WARE.

System.Reactive
System.Reactive.Core
System.Reactive.Interfaces
System.Reactive.Linq
https://github.com/dotnet/reactive

dotnet/reactive is licensed under the MIT License

A short and simple permissive license with conditions only requiring preservation of copyright and li-
cense notices. Licensed works, modifications, and larger works may be distributed under different terms
and without source code.

Permissions Limitations Conditions


Commercial use Liability License and copyright notice
Distribution Warranty
Modification
Private use

The MIT License (MIT)

Copyright (c) .NET Foundation and Contributors

All rights reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and asso-
ciated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial por-
tions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFT-
WARE.

ComponentOne
Copyright (C) 2004 GrapeCity inc.

16 No. 99MBC150A
Contents
Mitutoyo Software End User License Agreement………………………………………… 1

About This Document…………………………………………………………………………… 4

Conventions Used in This Document………………………………………………………… 5

Safety Precautions……………………………………………………………………………… 8

Precautions for Use………………………………………………………………………………10

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)………………………………………………………12

Export Control Compliance……………………………………………………………………12

Notes on Export to European Countries……………………………………………………12

Disposal of Products outside the European Countries……………………………………12

Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European


Countries with Separate Collection Systems)………………………………………………13

China RoHS Compliance Information…………………………………………………………13

Warranty……………………………………………………………………………………………14

Disclaimer…………………………………………………………………………………………14

Third Party Licenses……………………………………………………………………………15

Contents…………………………………………………………………………………………… i

PART A Overview
1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………………… A-1
1.1 Features……………………………………………………………………………… A-1
1.2 Measurement Principles…………………………………………………………… A-2

2 Example of the LSM System Configuration………………………………………… A-3

3 Part Names and Functions…………………………………………………………… A-9


3.1 Controller…………………………………………………………………………… A-9

4 LSMPAK Overview………………………………………………………………………A-13
4.1 Home Screen……………………………………………………………………… A-14
4.2 Detail Screen………………………………………………………………………… A-18
4.2.1 [Setting information] Tab……………………………………………………………………A-20
4.2.2 [Measurement history] Tab…………………………………………………………………A-22
4.2.3 [Work position] Tab…………………………………………………………………………A-25

i No. 99MBC150A
4.2.4 [Memorize light amount] Tab………………………………………………………………A-26
4.2.5 [Calibration] Tab……………………………………………………………………………A-27
4.2.6 [Preset/Offset] Tab…………………………………………………………………………A-28

4.3 Help Function………………………………………………………………………A-29

PART B Preparation
1 Unpacking and Checking……………………………………………………………… B-1

2 Setup……………………………………………………………………………………… B-3
2.1 Wiring and Connection…………………………………………………………… B-4
2.1.1 Socket Installation…………………………………………………………………………… B-4
2.1.2 Sensor Connection………………………………………………………………………… B-5
2.1.3 PC Connection……………………………………………………………………………… B-6
2.1.4 I/O Device Connection (if Required)……………………………………………………… B-7
2.1.5 Connection of Power Supply Terminal Wires and Power Supply……………………… B-9

2.2 Communication Method…………………………………………………………… B-11


2.3 LSMPAK Setup……………………………………………………………………… B-15
2.3.1 Installing LSMPAK………………………………………………………………………… B-15

PART C Operation
1 Measurement Flow……………………………………………………………………… C-1

2 Start-Up…………………………………………………………………………………… C-3
2.1 Launching LSMPAK………………………………………………………………… C-3
2.2 Exiting LSMPAK…………………………………………………………………… C-7
2.3 Confirming Device Information…………………………………………………… C-8

3 Settings…………………………………………………………………………………… C-9
3.1 Settings List………………………………………………………………………… C-9
3.2 [Environmental setting] Screen……………………………………………………C-19
3.3 Measurement Settings………………………………………………………………C-24
3.3.1 [Common setting 1] Screen…………………………………………………………………C-26
3.3.2 [Common setting 2] Screen……………………………………………………………… C-44
3.3.3 [Common setting 3] Screen……………………………………………………………… C-46
3.3.4 [Edit parameter set] Screen……………………………………………………………… C-50
3.3.5 [Measurement condition 1] Screen…………………………………………………… C-54
3.3.6 [Measurement condition 2] Screen…………………………………………………… C-59
3.3.7 [Check settings] Screen………………………………………………………………… C-66
3.3.8 Selecting Parameter Sets……………………………………………………………… C-68
3.3.9 Saving and Loading Settings Files……………………………………………………… C-69
3.3.10 Initialization of Settings……………………………………………………………………C-71

ii No. 99MBC150A
3.4 Memorize Light Amount……………………………………………………………C-73
3.4.1 Automatic Adjustment Mode………………………………………………………………C-73
3.4.2 [Use the previous value (Previous value update)] Mode………………………………C-74

3.5 Calculation……………………………………………………………………………C-76
3.5.1 Register Calculation…………………………………………………………………………C-76
3.5.2 Editing Calculation Settings…………………………………………………………… C-81
3.5.3 Clear Calculation………………………………………………………………………… C-82
3.5.4 Save and Load Calculation Setting Files……………………………………………… C-83

4 Calibration……………………………………………………………………………… C-85
4.1 Standard Calibration……………………………………………………………… C-87
4.2 Operational Calibration………………………………………………………… C-92

5 Measurements………………………………………………………………………… C-95
5.1 Setting the Workpiece…………………………………………………………… C-95
5.2 Setting the Preset and Offset…………………………………………………… C-97
5.2.1 Preset……………………………………………………………………………………… C-97
5.2.2 Offset……………………………………………………………………………………… C-102

5.3 Measurement Execution Method (Measurement Mode)……………………… C-105


5.3.1 Single Run Measurement……………………………………………………………… C-105
5.3.2 Continuous Run Measurement………………………………………………………… C-107

5.4 Confirming Measurements and Statistics……………………………………… C-108


5.4.1 Confirming Measured Values…………………………………………………………… C-108
5.4.2 Confirming Statistics……………………………………………………………………… C-109
5.4.3 Storage of Measured Values…………………………………………………………… C-110

6 Measure Procedure…………………………………………………………………… C-113


6.1 Basic Measurements…………………………………………………………… C-113
6.1.1 Outer Diameter Measurements………………………………………………………… C-113
6.1.2 Gap Measurement……………………………………………………………………… C-115
6.1.3 Run-Out Measurement………………………………………………………………… C-116
6.1.4 Thickness Measurement………………………………………………………………… C-118
6.1.5 Measurement (arithmetic calculation) with Multiple Combined LSMs……………… C-120

6.2 Advanced Measurement………………………………………………………… C-126


6.2.1 Transparent Object Measurement……………………………………………………… C-126
6.2.2 Outer Diameter Measurement of Precision-Machined Product…………………… C-130
6.2.3 Measuring Fast-Moving Wires………………………………………………………… C-131
6.2.4 Ultra-Fine Wire Measurements………………………………………………………… C-132
6.2.5 High-Precision Outer Diameter Measurement of Round Bar (Preset Function)…… C-134
6.2.6 Plate-Shaped Width Measurement (Preset Function)……………………………… C-136

iii No. 99MBC150A


6.2.7 Outer Diameter Measurement of Large-Diameter Round Bar (Pre-
set Function)……………………………………………………………………………… C-138
6.2.8 Thickness Measurement of Film Sheet (Preset Function)…………………………… C-140
6.2.9 Two Items Measurement of Outer Diameter and Run-Out of Rubber Roll (Sam-
ple Measurement)………………………………………………………………………… C-142
6.2.10 Outer Diameter Measurement of Shaft Processed with a Centerless Grinder (Au-
to-Work Detection Function)…………………………………………………………… C-145
6.2.11 Measurements of Stepped Round Bars……………………………………………… C-147
6.2.12 Measurement of Narrow Gaps………………………………………………………… C-149

PART D Interfaces
1 Interface Overview……………………………………………………………………… D-1

2 USB………………………………………………………………………………………… D-3
2.1 USB Specifications………………………………………………………………… D-3
2.1.1 USB Connector Specifications…………………………………………………………… D-3

2.2 USB Description of Operation…………………………………………………… D-4


2.2.1 USB Command List………………………………………………………………………… D-4
2.2.2 Example of USB Command Usage………………………………………………………D-18

3 I/O………………………………………………………………………………………… D-23
3.1 I/O Specifications………………………………………………………………… D-23
3.1.1 Terminal Block Connector Specifications……………………………………………… D-23
3.1.2 Connection Specifications…………………………………………………………………D-24

3.2 I/O Operation Description……………………………………………………… D-28


3.2.1 List of I/O Functions…………………………………………………………………………D-28
3.2.2 GO/NG Judgment Output……………………………………………………………… D-32
3.2.3 Measurement Operation………………………………………………………………… D-33
3.2.4 Timing Charts…………………………………………………………………………… D-35
3.2.5 Analog Output…………………………………………………………………………… D-43
3.2.6 Scan Waveform Output………………………………………………………………… D-43

4 IF Module……………………………………………………………………………… D-45

PART E Inspection and Maintenance


1 Display Check…………………………………………………………………………… E-1

2 Cleaning…………………………………………………………………………………… E-3

PART F Troubleshooting
1 Error Messages and Solutions………………………………………………………… F-1

2 Troubleshooting and Solutions……………………………………………………… F-5

iv No. 99MBC150A
PART G Appendix
1 Specifications…………………………………………………………………………… G-1
1.1 Specifications……………………………………………………………………… G-1
1.2 External Dimensions Drawing…………………………………………………… G-3

INDEX……………………………………………………………………………………… Index-1

SERVICE NETWORK……………………………………………………………………… App-1

v No. 99MBC150A
vi No. 99MBC150A
PART A
Overview
This part describes the features of the Laser Scan Micrometer (LSM), its measurement principle, sys-
tem configuration, names, and the functions of its controller and sensor, and gives an overview of its
configuration software (LSMPAK) and help functions.

1 Introduction…………………………………………………………………… A-1
2 Example of the LSM System Configuration………………………………… A-3
3 Part Names and Functions…………………………………………………… A-9
4 LSMPAK Overview…………………………………………………………… A-13

No. 99MBC150A
No. 99MBC150A
PART A : 1 Introduction

1 Introduction
The Laser Scan Micrometer (hereinafter, LSM) consists of a sensor, which is a detector, and a controller
(this product). In this manual, the set consisting of the sensor and controller (including the IF module if
used) are referred to as the "LSM".
Installing "LSMPAK", which is used exclusively for the LSM, on a PC allows device information and
measurement conditions to easily be set and measurement results to be monitored on the PC.
This chapter describes the features, measurement principles, etc. of the LSM.

1.1 Features
The LSM is a high-precision, non-contact measuring device capable of measuring length by a high-
speed scanning laser beam.
The LSM allows you to easily and accurately measure workpieces that are difficult to measure with con-
ventional instruments; for example:
y Workpieces with a hot surface
y Workpieces that should be kept free of damage, deformation, and defacement due to contact
y Soft workpieces for which measuring force is a concern

In addition to dimensional measurement, the following functions are available.


y By using an I/F module (optional), Ethernet communication or industrial network communication
can be performed by connecting a PC, PLC, and this product with a LAN cable.
y Scanning signals can be observed with an oscilloscope.
y The position of the workpiece is clearly displayed on LSMPAK.
y Segment measurement or edge measurement can be selected according to your application.
y Statistical calculations can be performed.
y Calculations (average, maximum, minimum, and range) can be performed on sampled measure-
ment values.
y Calculation of measured values (sum, average, standard deviation, difference, range, film thick-
ness) can be performed on multiple LSMs.
y Abnormal values in measurement data can be excluded.
y Communication with external devices is possible using USB or I/O analog interface.

A-1 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 1 Introduction

1.2 Measurement Principles


The LSM displays dimensions by measuring the duration in which the ultra-fine parallel laser beam is
obstructed by the workpiece to make a shadow.

Emission unit fθ lens Workpiece Condenser Reception


Motor unit
lens
Polygon mirror Amplifier

Semiconductor laser Light-receiving


Light-receiving element
element (reset
RS signal)

Motor driving pulse Clock pulse t t

ROM RAM Counter Gate Segment Edge signal


t selection circuit

Reset signal RS

CPU

As indicated in the figure above, the laser beam emitted from the semiconductor laser is reflected by the
polygon mirror that rotates at high speed in synchronization with the clock pulse, and is parallelized and
focused to minimum diameter at the measuring position by the collimator lens (fθ lens). The laser beam,
as a parallel light source, scans the workpiece at high speed, and is converged to the light-receiving
element by the condenser lens.
The light-receiving element induces an output voltage according to the light-dark change caused by the
laser beam being obstructed by the workpiece. The pulses generated by changes in voltage during the
time the laser beam is blocked by the measurement workpiece are counted, processed by the CPU, and
output to external devices as dimensions.
This measurement principle enables measurement not only of the workpiece (dark parts) but also clear-
ances between workpieces (light areas). The part to be measured is switched by specifying a segment
(a light-dark number).

A-2 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 2 Example of the LSM System Configuration

2 Example of the LSM System


Configuration
This chapter describes configuration of measurement systems that use LSMs.
For communication, this product is connected to a PC or I/O device with a USB cable.
By connecting an IF module (optional) to this product, Ethernet communication or industrial network
communication can also be performed.

■ When using USB communication

Devices required for system configuration

Device name Description


Controller LSM-CU-A (this product)
Sensor LSM-02-A (0.005 mm–2 mm) or LSM-30-A (0.3 mm–30 mm) can be connected
to this product.
"Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor> User's Manual" (separate document)
PC LSMPAK can be used to make LSM settings and check measurements (up to
eight sets).
Connect to this product with a USB Type-C cable. When using two or more sets
of LSMs, use a USB hub.
"2.1 USB Specifications" on page D-3 in "PART D Interfaces"
I/O device (option- Enables output of GO/NG judgments and analog output of measured values.
al) "■ Analog signal connection specifications" on page D-26 in "PART D Inter-
faces"

● When using one set of LSM


LSMPAK (PC)

Connected to this product


I/O device
(arrow direction: flow of signal)
(optional)

USB
LSM

Sensor
LSM-02-A
Controller
LSM-30-A
LSM-CU-A (this product)

A-3 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 2 Example of the LSM System Configuration

● When using two or more sets of LSMs


LSMPAK (PC)

Attached to this product

I/O device
Connected to this product (optional)
(arrow direction: flow of signal)

LSM USB

USB hub

Sensor
LSM-02-A Controller
LSM-30-A LSM-CU-A (this product)

LSM

Sensor
LSM-02-A Controller
LSM-30-A LSM-CU-A (this product)

■ When using Ethernet communication or industrial network communication

Devices required for system configuration

Device name Description


Controller LSM-CU-A (this product)
Sensor LSM-02-A (0.005 mm–2 mm) or LSM-30-A (0.3 mm–30 mm) can be connected
to this product. Two types of sensors can be used together.
"Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor> User's Manual" (separate document)
PC LSMPAK can be used to make LSM settings and check measurements (up to
eight sets).
Use an STP cable of Cat.5e or higher for connection to this product. When
using two or more sets of LSMs, connect them via a hub or network, or dai-
sy-chain them.
I/O device Enables output of GO/NG judgments and analog output of measured values.
(optional) "■ Analog signal connection specifications" on page D-26 in "PART D Inter-
faces"

A-4 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 2 Example of the LSM System Configuration

Device name Description


IF module IF modules (optional) are available for EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT and
(optional) CC-Link IE TSN.
Connection to another controller is possible using a LAN cable.
"IF Module <EtherNet/IP> User's Manual" (separate document)
"IF Module <PROFINET> User's Manual" (separate document)
"IF Module <EtherCAT> User's Manual" (separate document)
"IF Module <CC-Link IE TSN> User's Manual" (separate document)

IMPORTANT
When using the IF module <EtherCAT>, connect the LSM and LSMPAK via USB. Eth-
ernet connection cannot be used.
PLC (optional) A PLC can be used to switch parameter sets, collect data, etc.

● When using one set of LSM


LSMPAK (PC)

Attached to this product

Connected to this product


(arrow direction: flow of signal)

Ethernet or industrial network communication

LSM

IF module
(optional)

Sensor
LSM-02-A Controller
LSM-30-A LSM-CU-A (this product)

A-5 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 2 Example of the LSM System Configuration

● When using two or more sets of LSMs


Use a hub or network
LSMPAK (PC)

Attached to this product


PLC

Connected to this product


(arrow direction: flow of signal) Industrial
network
Ethernet or industrial
network communication
LSM

IF module Hub or net-


(optional) work

Sensor
LSM-02-A Controller
LSM-30-A LSM-CU-A (this product)

LSM

IF module
(optional)

Sensor
LSM-02-A Controller
LSM-30-A LSM-CU-A (this product)

A-6 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 2 Example of the LSM System Configuration

Daisy-chain LSMs with each other


LSMPAK (PC)

Attached to this product


PLC

Connected to this product


(arrow direction: flow of signal)
Industrial
Ethernet or industrial network
network communication

LSM

IF module
(optional)

Sensor
LSM-02-A Controller
LSM-30-A LSM-CU-A (this product)

LSM

IF module
(optional)

Sensor
LSM-02-A Controller
LSM-30-A LSM-CU-A (this product)

IMPORTANT
When using the LSMPAK with an Ethernet connection, do not make any configuration changes that involve
rebooting the equipment while multiple controllers are daisy-chained together. The timing of the reboots may
cause the chain to break and cause unexpected behavior.

A-7 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 2 Example of the LSM System Configuration

■ Storage location of settings


Depending on content, settings made with LSMPAK are stored either in the controller or a PC. No set-
tings in particular are stored in the sensor.

IMPORTANT
Calculation conditions and environmental settings are not stored in the controller. If you change the connected
PC or PLC, re-set the calculation conditions and environmental settings.

Settings stored in the controller


y Common settings (one set)
y Parameter sets (20 sets)
y Unit settings
y Memorize light amount
y Calibration
y Preset/Offset

Tips
[Calibration] and [Preset/Offset] information is stored in the controller, so keep this in mind when replacing the
sensor. After replacing the sensor, re-calibrate and re-set the preset and offset.

Settings stored in PC
y Environmental settings (language, communication method, number of decimal places, and security
function)
See "3.2 [Environmental setting] Screen" on page C-19 in "PART C Operation".

Tips
Unit settings are not saved in LSMPAK. They are saved in the controller.

y Complete set of controller settings*1


y Calculation conditions*1
See "4.2 Operational Calibration" on page C-92 in "PART C Operation".
y Measurement history*2
*1 Saved as a file on the PC by LSMPAK's [Save setting file] button. For details, see "3.3.9 Saving
and Loading Settings Files" on page C-69 in "PART C Operation".
*2 The data is saved as a file on the PC by LSMPAK's [Save measurement data] button. For details, see
"5.4.1 Confirming Measured Values" on page C-108 in "PART C Operation".

A-8 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 3 Part Names and Functions

3 Part Names and Functions


This chapter describes the name and function of each part of this product.

3.1 Controller

■ Front view

② ③ ④ ⑤

No. Name Function


① LEDs (indicator lamps) Indicate the status of the LSM.
For details, see "1 Display Check" on page E-1 in the "PART
E Inspection and Maintenance" section.
② Signal cable connector Connect the sensor signal cable.

A-9 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 3 Part Names and Functions

No. Name Function


③ I/O terminal block A terminal block with I/O and analog outputs.

NOTICE
• Turn off the external power supply before you connect the
I/O terminals.
• When wiring, be sure to touch the terminal wires to the
metal part of the controller to discharge any static electric-
ity. If you touch the terminal wires to the I/O terminals in
the terminal block while your body holds a static electric
charge, the internal circuitry could be damaged by an
electric discharge.
Do not touch the I/O terminals in the terminal block during
operation. Otherwise, an operation error may result.

Tips
• The I/O terminal block socket is included with the controller. Insert
the I/O terminal block socket into the I/O terminals before use.
• Pin numbers are printed above the holes for the I/O terminal block.
Use them when wiring.

④ Power supply terminal For connecting the power supply terminals.


block
CAUTION
• Turn off the external power supply before you connect the
I/O terminals.
• When wiring, be sure to touch the terminal wires to the
metal part of the controller to discharge any static electric-
ity. If you touch the terminal wires to the I/O terminals in
the terminal block while your body holds a static electric
charge, the internal circuitry could be damaged by an
electric discharge.
Do not touch the I/O terminals in the terminal block during
operation. Otherwise, an operation error may result.

Connect the grounding terminals to the two holes on the


right edge of the power supply terminal block.
This helps reduce noise.
"2.1.5 Connection of Power Supply Terminal Wires and
Power Supply" on page B-9

Tips
The power supply terminal block socket is included with the controller.
Insert the power supply terminal block socket into the power supply
terminals before use.

⑤ USB connector For connecting a USB cable (type C).

Tips
For details on each connector, see "PART D Interfaces" on page D-i.

A-10 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 3 Part Names and Functions

■ Rear view
① ② ③ ④

No. Name Function


① Nameplate Labeled with the code number, serial number, etc.
② Mounting groove for DIN For mounting a DIN rail.
rail "2 Setup" on page B-3
③ Slide tab for DIN rail Secures the DIN rail mounted to this product.
④ Regulatory label Contains information regarding regulations.

A-11 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 3 Part Names and Functions

MEMO

A-12 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4 LSMPAK Overview
IMPORTANT
When using LSMPAK to acquire measurements, it cannot be used in conjunction with other tools (such as
customer-provided monitoring tools, I/O devices, and PLCs).

LSMPAK is an application that runs on a PC running the Windows operating system.


Used to set measurement conditions, collect measurement values, and manage equipment information
in LSMs.
For details on how to install LSMPAK, see "2.3.1 Installing LSMPAK" on page B-15 in "PART B
Preparation".

LSMPAK has a home screen and a detail screen.


The home screen displays a measurement list and various menus.
The detail screen displays the following tabs.
y Setting information
y Measurement history
y Work position
y Memorize light amount
y Calibration
y Preset/Offset
For details on measurement settings, see "3 Settings" on page C-9 in "PART C Operation".

Tips
• LSMPAK requires a display with a resolution of 1280 x 768 or higher. On displays with a resolution of less
than 1280 × 768, some areas may not be displayed or the layout may be broken.
• LSMPAK does not allow the keyboard to be used to start or stop measurements or to select items.

A-13 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4.1 Home Screen


Home screen (measurement list screen)

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦

Home screen (measurement list screen) when making calculation settings

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦

A-14 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

No. Name Description


① [Connected Device] button Displays a list of controllers, sensors, and IF modules (option-
al) connected to the PC.
"2.3 Confirming Device Information" on page C-8 in
"PART C Operation"
② [Register calculation] / [Clear [Register calculation] button is for calculations of multiple LSM
calculation] buttons measurements. The [Clear calculation] button appears during
calculation registration.

IMPORTANT
• Be sure to use the same sensor model when performing arith-
metic operations.
• Calculation settings are saved in the PC. Please note that data
is not saved in the controller, so be careful when changing PCs.
"■ Storage location of settings" on page A-8

Tips
For details on the arithmetic operations screen, see "3.5.1 Reg-
ister Calculation" on page C-76 in "PART C Operation".

③ Status display area Displays the corresponding symbol lights and the number of
(Error) cases when an error, warning or NG measurement occurs.
(Warning) "1 Error Messages and Solutions" on page F-1 in "PART
(NG measured) F Troubleshooting".
④ Help mode toggle button Turns the help mode display on or off.
"4.3 Help Function" on page A-29
⑤ Manual display button Displays this User's Manual in PDF format.
⑥ Environmental setting display Displays the Environmental setting screen.
button Set language and security function.
"3.2 [Environmental setting] Screen" on page C-19 in
"PART C Operation"
⑦ LSMPAK information button Displays LSMPAK version information.
⑧ Measurement list Displays a list of measurement information.
For details on displayed measurement information, see
"● Contents displayed in the measurement information" on
page A-16

A-15 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

● Contents displayed in the measurement information


For individual measurements

① ④ ⑤ ⑦ ⑧⑨ ⑩ ⑫

② ③ ⑥ ⑪

If calculation is set

① ④ ⑫

② ③ ⑬ ⑭

No. Description
① Displays a name (label) to identify each item of measurement information.
② Displays GO/NG judgment results.
The background color changes according to the measurement status.

If the GO/NG judgment results in GO, it is displayed in green.

If the GO/NG judgment results in NG (fail), it is displayed in red.


The gage indicates whether the measured value is +NG (NG above the
upper limit) or -NG (NG below the lower limit).
Gage

If GO/NG judgment is not used, it is displayed in black.

If there is an error, it is displayed in red, and the error number and error
name are shown. Click the icon to display the PDF instruction manual
(this manual).

When the unit is in the measurement-ready state for measurement, it is


displayed in gray.
③ Displays measured values.
④ Displays the unit.
⑤ Displays the parameter set number.
⑥ Displays measurement items (outer diameter, runout, gap, etc.).
⑦ Displays the calibration status.
Calibration completed:
Calibration not completed:
⑧ Displays the model name of the controller.
⑨ Displays the model name of the sensor.

A-16 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

No. Description
⑩ If the controller is equipped with an IF module (optional), also displays the model name of the
IF module.
⑪ Displays the status of each device.
Green: The LSM is operating normally.
Red: y An error occurred in the LSM.
"1 Error Messages and Solutions" on page F-1 in "PART F Troubleshooting"
y LSM device settings are incomplete.
"2.3 Confirming Device Information" on page C-8 in "PART C Operation"
⑫ Displays the control buttons.
:S tops measurement. This button is grayed out except during measurement.
:P erforms measurement just once. The button is grayed out during measurement.
"5.3.1 Single Run Measurement" on page C-105 in "PART C Operation"
:P erforms measurement continuously. The button is grayed out during measurement.
"5.3.2 Continuous Run Measurement" on page C-107 in "PART C Operation"
:D
 isplays the detail screen.
Here you can check/edit settings, check measurement history, adjust workpiece
position, record light amount, execute calibration and make preset/offset settings.
"4.2 Detail Screen" on page A-18
⑬ Displays the calculation method.
⑭ Displays measurement information used for calculation.

A-17 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4.2 Detail Screen


Click [Detail] in the measurement information of the home screen to display the detail screen. The detail
screen displays LSM settings used for the selected measurement information and other details.

③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧

Detail screen when making calculation settings


③ ④ ⑦ ⑧

No. Name Description


① [Back] button Returns to the home screen.
② Measurement information Displays contents of the selected measurement informa-
tion.
Content and functions displayed are the same as in the
home screen.
However, the code number and serial number of the con-
troller, sensor, and IF module are displayed only on the
detail screen.
For details on displayed measurement information, see
"● Contents displayed in the measurement information"
on page A-16.
③ [Setting information] tab Displays device and settings information.
"4.2.1 [Setting information] Tab" on page A-20
④ [Measurement history] tab Displays the measurement history.
"4.2.2 [Measurement history] Tab" on page A-22
⑤ [Work position] tab Displays the workpiece position and the scan signal.
"4.2.3 [Work position] Tab" on page A-25
⑥ [Memorize light amount] tab Records the light intensity.
"4.2.4 [Memorize light amount] Tab" on page A-26

A-18 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

No. Name Description


⑦ [Calibration] tab Executes calibration.
"4.2.5 [Calibration] Tab" on page A-27
⑧ [Preset/Offset] tab Sets the preset and offset.
"4.2.6 [Preset/Offset] Tab" on page A-28

A-19 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4.2.1 [Setting information] Tab

② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥

⑦ ⑧

[Setting information] tab screen during calculation setting


② ③ ④ ⑤

No. Name Description


① [Edit settings] button Displays the edit settings screen.
[Edit calculation setting] button See "3 Settings" on page C-9 in "PART C Operation".
when making calculation settings
Tips
• The button is disabled during measurement.
• If the security function is enabled in the environmental set-
tings, a prompt for password entry appears when this button
is pressed.

② Label A name to identify measurement information


You can change the name as desired. Specify using up
to 13 single-byte alphabetic characters (uppercase only),
numbers, and _ (underscore).
Clicking displays a screen for editing the label.
③ Setting file name Displays the setting file name set in the measurement
[Calculation file name] when information.
making calculation settings

A-20 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

No. Name Description


④ [Save setting file] button
[Save calculation file] button
when making calculation settings
⑤ [Open setting file] button Loads a previously saved setting file into the controller.
[Open calculation file] button For details on settings that can be read, see "3.3.9 Sav-
when making calculation settings ing and Loading Settings Files" on page C-69 in "PART C
Operation".

Tips
If the security function is enabled in the environmental set-
tings, a prompt for password entry appears when this button is
pressed.

⑥ [Initialization] button Initializes setting information (common settings and param-


eter settings).

IMPORTANT
After initialization, setting information is returned to the initial
factory values.

"3.3.10 Initialization of Settings" on page C-71 in "PART


C Operation"

Tips
If the security function is enabled in the environmental set-
tings, a prompt for password entry appears when this button is
pressed.

⑦ Common settings information Displays information regarding current common settings.


Unused functions are grayed out.
⑧ Information about parameter Displays information about current parameter settings.
settings Unused functions are grayed out.
⑨ Calculation method Displays the calculation method (sum, average, standard
deviation, difference, range, or film thickness).
⑩ GO/NG judgment conditions Displays the GO/NG judgment method (condition).
⑪ Measurement information details Displays details the measurement information used during
calculation.
Labels for measurement information

Illustration depicting measurement parameter LSM in use

Tips
For details on calculation, see "3.5.1 Register Calculation" on page C-76 in "PART C Operation".

A-21 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4.2.2 [Measurement history] Tab


② ③

④ ⑤

[Measurement history] tab screen during calculation setting


② ③

④ ⑤

No. Name Description


① [Clear] button Clears measurements and statistical values. When making
calculation settings, the measurement history of the LSM
registered in the calculation is also cleared.
② [View statistics] button Displays statistics.
"5.4.2 Confirming Statistics" on page C-109 in "PART C
Operation"
③ [Save measurement data] button Saves measurement data as a CSV file.

A-22 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

No. Name Description


④ [Measurement history] Lists measurement data history.
Parameter set No.

Measurement No. Measured value


Displays the latest data. New data is added from the bot-
tom, oldest data disappears first when the number of data
items exceeds 15. Also note that data is lost when LSM-
PAK is closed.
y Measurement No.: Up to 100,000 points.
y Parameter set No.: Indicates the parameter set used as
a number from No.00 through No.19.
y Measured value: With millimeters, up to 5 decimal plac-
es are displayed; with inches, up to 6 decimal places are
displayed.

With two items measurement, parameter set numbers and


measured values are displayed in two columns.
For details on two items measurement, see "■ Two
items measurement" on page C-31 in "PART C Operation".
If GO/NG judgment is set, measurements that exceed the
limit values are displayed in red as NG.

A-23 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

No. Name Description

Statistical values
Click the [View statistics] button to display statistics.
The contents are displayed as follows.
y N: Number of sample measurement
y AVG: Average
y S.D: Standard deviation
y R: Range
y MAX: Maximum value
y MIN: Minimum value
Displays statistics to 5 decimal places for millimeters and
to 6 decimal places for inches.
With two items measurement, statistical values are dis-
played in two columns.
For details on two items measurement, see "■ Two
items measurement" on page C-31 in "PART C Operation".
⑤ Measurement history (graph) Displays the measurement data history as a line graph.
Also displays thresholds if a GO/NG judgment method is
set.

A-24 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4.2.3 [Work position] Tab


This tab displays the position of the workpiece relative to the sensor. By moving the workpiece while
viewing the screen, the workpiece can be placed in the optimal position for measurement.
The position along the optical axis is displayed in the [Work position (parallel)] area.

The position in the scanning direction is displayed in the [Work position (up and down)] area.

● [Work position (parallel)]


The degree of focus blur and the scale indicate where the workpiece is located along the optical axis
relative to the LSM's measurement range.
For details on how to adjust the workpiece position, see "5.1 Setting the Workpiece" on page C-95 in
"PART C Operation".

● [Work position (up and down)]


The scale shows where the workpiece is located in the scan direction relative to the LSM measurement
range.
For details on how to adjust the workpiece position, see "5.1 Setting the Workpiece" on page C-95 in
"PART C Operation".

A-25 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4.2.4 [Memorize light amount] Tab


This tab sets the light amount memorize mode.
After setting the light amount memorize mode, we recommend recalibrating and remaking the preset/
offset values.
For details, see "3.4 Memorize Light Amount" on page C-73 in "PART C Operation".

A-26 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4.2.5 [Calibration] Tab


This tab is used to execute calibration.
After executing calibration, the preset and offset are cleared.
For details, see "3 Settings" on page C-9 in "PART C Operation".

[Calibration] tab screen during calculation setting

A-27 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4.2.6 [Preset/Offset] Tab


This tab sets the preset and offset.
Offset is cleared when the preset setting is changed.
For details, see "5.2 Setting the Preset and Offset" on page C-97 in "PART C Operation".

[Preset/Offset] tab screen during calculation setting

A-28 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

4.3 Help Function


Clicking the help mode toggle button on each screen switches the screen to help mode.
Clicking the guidance display button for an item displays the guidance in the guidance display area at
the bottom of the screen.

Tips
You cannot switch to help mode during the following operations.
• While light amount is being recorded
• During calibration
• While making preset/offset settings

Example of help mode display (Home screen)

A-29 No. 99MBC150A


PART A : 4 LSMPAK Overview

Example of help mode display ([Environmental setting] screen)


No. Name Description


① Help mode toggle button Turns the help mode display on or off.
② Guidance display button This is the question-mark button displayed beside a term or
setting item. Clicking this button displays a simple description
in the guidance display area.

Tips
The guidance display button is displayed when help mode is on.

③ Guidance display area Displays a brief explanation of terms and settings.


Pressing the guidance display button displays a simple de-
scription in the guidance display area.
If a detailed description is required, click . The cor-
responding section from the "Laser Scan Micrometer <Con-
troller> User's Manual" PDF is displayed.

Tips
The guidance display area is displayed when help mode is on.

A-30 No. 99MBC150A


PART B
Preparation
This part first describes the product items to be checked in preparation for measurement. Next, it de-
scribes how to connect this product with other devices (sensors, optional accessories, interface devic-
es, etc.) and how to check the operation.

1 Unpacking and Checking……………………………………………………… B-1


2 Setup…………………………………………………………………………… B-3

No. 99MBC150A
No. 99MBC150A
PART B : 1 Unpacking and Checking

1 Unpacking and Checking


After removing the product from its packaging, check for missing parts and damage.
This product has been thoroughly inspected prior to shipment. The mechanical, optical, and electrical
systems are guaranteed to operate properly.
First, remove the product from its packaging and check the following.
y Make sure that the product and accessories are all present
y No damage was sustained by these devices during transit.

If you have any questions, contact the agent where you purchased the product or a Mitutoyo sales
office.

■ This product and attachments


Part No. Name Quantity
02AGQ210 LSM-CU-A controller (this product) 1
D800-396 I/O terminal block socket 1
D827-827 Power supply terminal block socket 1
02AGQ068 Grounding wire (4 m) 1
99MBC151B Quick Start Manual 1
02NGA070 CD (containing the following files) 1
y LSMPAK Installer
y User's Manual (PDF) (this document)
WA140 General product warranty (large) 1

B-1 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 1 Unpacking and Checking

MEMO

B-2 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

2 Setup
CAUTION
First, check that the power to this product is off. If power is being supplied, shut off the power supply.
Working with this product while it is energized may result in electric shock.

B-3 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

2.1 Wiring and Connection

2.1.1 Socket Installation


Insert the I/O terminal block socket and the power supply terminal block socket into the I/O terminal and
power supply terminal of this product.
Refer to the following figure and insert the sockets straight into the product in the correct orientation.
When the socket is fully inserted, the lever on the socket will rise.

I/O terminal block socket

Power supply terminal block socket

B-4 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

2.1.2 Sensor Connection


See the table below for sensors that can be connected to this product.

Sensor Signal cable Junction cable


LSM-02-A (integrated body) P N/A
LSM-30-A (separable body) P P

For the names of the sensor parts, see "2.1 Launching LSMPAK" on page C-3 in "PART C Opera-
tion". For details about the sensors, see "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor> User's Manual" (separate
document).

NOTICE
• After connecting the junction cable, connect the wires to the power supply terminal block to supply
power.
If you connect the junction cable after supplying power, the sensor may become damaged.
• Sensors models other than those listed above cannot be connected to this product.

Signal cable

Reception unit

Junction cable

Emission unit Mount

1 Connect the junction cable of the sensor (LSM-30-A) to the lower connector (5-pin) on the rear
panel of the emission unit.

2 Connect the round connector (12-pin) of the signal cable to the upper connector (12-pin) on the
rear panel of the sensor emission unit.

3 Connect the signal cable's rectangular connector (15-pin) to the [TRANSMITTER] connector on
the front of the controller and tighten the screws on the left and right sides.

B-5 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

2.1.3 PC Connection
Connect this product to a PC using a USB cable (type C).

CAUTION
Check that the power to both this product and the PC is off, and then connect this product to the PC.
Working with this product and a PC while they are energized may result in electric shock.

IMPORTANT
Even when operating LSM via Ethernet communication or industrial network communication using the IF mod-
ule (optional), connection to the product must first be made via USB in order to set its IP address and commu-
nication method.
• For details on IP address setting, see "■ How to check the [Connected Device] screen" on page C-8 in
"PART C Operation".
• For details on communication method settings, see "■ Communication method" on page C-20 in "PART
C Operation".

Tips
The user is responsible for supplying a USB cable (type C).

Connection example: this product (one unit) + sensor (one unit) + PC (one unit)

USB connector

PC

■ When using two or more sets of LSMs


Use a USB type C cable and USB hub to connect each LSM to the PC.

B-6 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

2.1.4 I/O Device Connection (if Required)


Connect this product to an I/O device using the I/O terminal block.

CAUTION
Check that the power to both this product and the I/O device is off, and then connect this product to
the I/O device.
Working with this product and I/O equipment while they are energized may result in electric shock.

Tips
• The user is responsible for supplying an I/O cable.
• For details on I/O connectors, see "3.1.1 Terminal Block Connector Specifications" on page D-23 in
"PART D Interfaces".

I/O device

1 Press a flathead screwdriver against the flathead screwdriver slot on the terminal block socket.

Slot for flathead screwdriver

B-7 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

2 Exerting pressure on the flathead screwdriver slot with the flathead screwdriver, insert the
cable into the terminal hole.

IMPORTANT
Push the terminal unit in until it hits the back.

3 Remove the flathead screwdriver.

Tips
It is also possible to attach the terminals to the terminal block after removing it from the controller, and then to
reattach the terminal block to the controller after attaching the terminal wires.
In this case, place the terminal block on a flat desk and insert the terminal wires into the terminal holes in ac-
cordance with steps 1 through 3 .

4 Pull inserted terminal wires lightly by hand to confirm that they do not come out.

Tips
If you want to reinsert terminal wires, check that the power to this product is off, and then do the following.
Press a flathead screwdriver against the flathead screwdriver slot and pull out the terminal wires. Then, insert
the terminal wires into the terminal holes in the manner described in steps 1 through 3 .
The flathead screwdriver slots are outward from the terminal holes (at the top for the upper row, at the bottom
for the lower row).

B-8 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

2.1.5 Connection of Power Supply Terminal Wires and Power Sup-


ply
After you have finished connecting this product to a sensor, PC, and I/O device, connect the power sup-
ply terminal wires and grounding wires to the power supply terminal block.

CAUTION
Before making connection to the power supply terminals, make sure that the terminals are not ener-
gized.
Touching the power terminals while the system is energized may result in electric shock or burns.

NOTICE
When wiring, be sure to touch the terminal wires to the metal part of the controller to discharge any
static electricity. If you touch the terminal wires to the terminal block while your body holds a static
electric charge, the internal circuitry could be damaged by an electric discharge.

Connect the grounding terminals to the two holes on the right edge of the power supply terminal
block.
This helps reduce noise.

For details about where to connect the power supply terminal wires and grounding wires, see the follow-
ing figure.

Power sup-
ply terminal Grounding
connection wire connec-
location tion location

Connection specifications for power terminal block


Item Specification
Power voltage DC+24 V±10 %
Current consumption 3.0 A or more
Wire diameter AWG14-30
Stripped line length 7 mm
Power cable length Length that accounts for voltage attenuation
* The power supply requirements pertain at the point
of terminal block input.

B-9 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

1 Press a flathead screwdriver against the flathead screwdriver slot.

Slot for flathead screwdriver

2 Insert the terminal wire into the terminal hole while pressing with the flathead screwdriver.

IMPORTANT
Push the terminal unit in until it hits the back.

3 Remove the flathead screwdriver.

Tips
It is also possible to attach the terminals to the terminal block after removing it from the controller, and then to
reattach the terminal block to the controller after attaching the terminal wires.
In this case, place the terminal block on a flat desk and insert the terminal wires into the terminal holes in ac-
cordance with steps 1 through 3 .

4 Pull inserted terminal wires lightly by hand to confirm that they do not come out.

Tips
If you want to reinsert the power supply terminal wires or grounding wires, check that the power to this product
is off, and then do the following.
Press a flathead screwdriver against the flathead screwdriver slot and pull out the terminal wires. Then, insert
the terminal wires into the terminal holes in the manner described in steps 1 through 3 .
The flathead screwdriver slots are outward from the terminal holes (at the top for the upper row, at the bottom
for the lower row).

5 Supply power to the LSM.

B-10 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

2.2 Communication Method

■ Installation using a DIN rail


There are horizontal and vertical grooves for a DIN rail on the rear of this product.
If you will be arranging controllers vertically, use the vertical grooves. If you will be arranging controllers
horizontally, use the horizontal grooves.
The following explanation describes the procedure for attaching a DIN rail to the horizontal DIN groove.

Groove for DIN rail (vertical)

Mounting tab
Groove for DIN
rail (horizontal)

Slide tab

B-11 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

1 Hook the two mounting tabs of this product onto the upper edge of the DIN rail.

2 Place the lower edge of the DIN rail against the tapered part on the inner part of the two slide
tabs, and then press this product against the DIN rail until you hear a click.
» This product is secured to the DIN rail.

B-12 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

■ Removal from a DIN rail

1 Hold this product with both hands.

2 Press this product upward.


» The slide tabs (two locations) are
pressed in.
» The mounting tabs (two locations) disen-
gage from the DIN rail.

3 Remove this product from the DIN rail.

B-13 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

■ Replacing the slide tabs


Slide tabs (four pieces) are attached to this product when it is shipped.
Two slided tabs are required in order to mount this product on a DIN rail. Keep the two remaining slide
tabs for use as spares.
If a slide tab breaks, replace it according to the following procedure.

1 Remove the slide tab.

1 Insert a flathead screwdriver into the


bottom of the S-shaped part of the slide
tab (the side not connected to the outer
frame).
3
2 Lightly lift the S-shaped part of the slide 2
piece with the flathead screwdriver. 1
» The pin attached to the bottom of the
S-shaped part disengages from its hole.

3 With the pin disengaged, slide the


S-shaped part using the flathead screw-
driver.
» The slide tab comes off.

2 Attach the new slide tab.

1 Insert the upper side of the S-shaped


part of the slide tab (the side connected
to the outer frame) into the rails on the
controller.

» The pin on the S-shaped part engages


with its hole and the slide tab is at-
tached.

B-14 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

2.3 LSMPAK Setup

2.3.1 Installing LSMPAK


LSMPAK manages and controls the LSM settings, monitoring of measured values, displaying of the GO/
NG judgment result, error information, etc.
Operating environment
• Windows 10 Home 64 bit
• Windows 10 Pro 64 bit
The LSMPAK installer is provided on a CD and is included with this product.

Tips
The LSMPAK installer can also be downloaded from our website (https://www.mitutoyo.co.jp/downloads/soft-
ware-drivers/).

1 Sign on to Windows with an account that has administrative privileges.

2 Insert the provided CD into your PC.

3 Double-click "setup.exe" on the CD.


» The LSMPAK installer launches.

4 Follow the on-screen instructions to install LSMPAK.

IMPORTANT
If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes].

5 Disable sleep mode and power saving mode in the PC settings.

IMPORTANT
If the PC enters sleep mode or power saving mode, communication with the LSM is interrupted, and LSMPAK
will be forced to terminate with a system error. Forced termination will result in loss of measurement history
data.

B-15 No. 99MBC150A


PART B : 2 Setup

MEMO

B-16 No. 99MBC150A


PART C
Operation
This part describes the operations for configuring the various functions, from the basic operation flow
to methods for obtaining more accurate measurements.
There are some restrictions on the combination of measurement functions. Confirm the content before
using this product.
For details about the restrictions, see "● Exclusivity of items in the [Common setting 1] screen" on
page C-26.

1 Measurement Flow…………………………………………………………… C-1


2 Start-Up………………………………………………………………………… C-3
3 Settings………………………………………………………………………… C-9
4 Calibration……………………………………………………………………… C-85
5 Measurements………………………………………………………………… C-95
6 Measure Procedure………………………………………………………… C-113

No. 99MBC150A
No. 99MBC150A
PART C : 1 Measurement Flow

1 Measurement Flow
Set- Warm- Launching LSMPAK
Start LSMPAK.
tings ing-up ( C-3 page)

Confirm device information.


Confirming device information
( C-8 page)

Configure the LSMPAK environ-


LSMPAK environmental settings mental settings.
( C-19 page)

Configure the settings for measure-


Set items related to measure-
ment.
ment. ( C-19 page)
Common settings Tips
Once the settings are complete,
this operation is not needed
again unless the configuration is
Parameter settings changed.

Let the power run for 30 minutes Wait until the operation of the
to an hour. LSM has stabilized.

Perform two or three times annu-


ally. ( C-73 page)
Set [Memorize light amount]. Record light intensity when mea-
suring narrow gaps. ( C-149
page)

Calibration Always execute calibration be-


Execute calibration. fore measuring.
( C-9 page)

C-1 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 1 Measurement Flow

Measurement Set the preset and offset.


Set the preset and offset.
( C-97 page)

Set a workpiece.
Set the workpiece.
( C-95 page)

For examples of settings for


various measurements, see the
following descriptions.
Perform the measurement. y Basic measurements
( C-113 page)
y Advanced measurement
( C-126 page)

C-2 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 2 Start-Up

2 Start-Up

2.1 Launching LSMPAK

1 Check that the LSM and external devices are connected to the PC and have power supplied.

2 Turn on the PC.

3 Double-click the LSMPAK icon on the desktop.

» Information on connected LSMs is displayed on the LSMPAK home screen.

IMPORTANT
• When activating LSMPAK, make sure that the LSM is in measurement standby mode (the controller's POW-
ER LED is lit green).
If you activate LSMPAK when the controller's POWER LED is blinking green (during startup or measure-
ment), not only will measurement stop, but the LSMPAK may be damaged and not start. If the LSMPAK is
damaged, reinstall the LSMPAK.
• Make sure that LSMPAK is not running while connecting cables or making connections. If a cable is con-
nected or disconnected while LSMPAK is running, LSMPAK will report a system error and will be forcibly
terminated. Forced termination will result in loss of measurement history data.
• When using LSMPAK via Remote Desktop, do not disconnect or reconnect Remote Desktop while LSMPAK
is in use. Disconnecting or reconnecting Remote Desktop while using LSMPAK may force LSMPAK to termi-
nate with a system error. Forced termination will result in loss of measurement history data.

Tips
• Depending on PC specifications and the number of LSMs connected, it may take a few dozen seconds for
LSMPAK to start. Please wait without exiting LSMPAK.
• If the PC and LSM are connected via Ethernet, the LSM may not be recognized immediately after installation
of LSMPAK. For what to do if the LSM is not recognized, see "● If communication with the LSM fails" on
page C-6.

C-3 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 2 Start-Up

Tips
The application is shipped with initial values set for the measurement settings (common settings and parameter
settings).

■ What to do if a dialog box appears at startup

● Verifying the LSM configuration


When LSMPAK is launched, a dialog appears if the LSM configuration has changed since the last time
connection was made or if there is a mixture of LSMs with different unit settings.
After reviewing the contents and changing settings as necessary, click [Start].

If LSM configuration has changed since last connection

C-4 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 2 Start-Up

If an LSM is connected that has a different unit setting than the last time connection was
made.

Clicking [Start] launches LSMPAK with the unit setting of the connected LSM.

If units of measure are mixed


One of the following [Unit] screens will appear.

y When LSMs with millimeter and inch settings are mixed and millimeter-only type LSMs are includ-
ed

Clicking [Start] launches LSMPAK with the unit set to mm.


In addition, the measurement unit changes to mm for all connected LSMs, and those LSMs whose
unit has been changed are restarted.

IMPORTANT
When using the LSMPAK with an Ethernet connection, do not make any configuration changes that in-
volve rebooting the equipment while multiple controllers are daisy-chained together. The timing of the
reboots may cause the chain to break and cause unexpected behavio.

If LSMPAK measurement units have changed since the last connection, the following screen will
appear; click [OK].

C-5 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 2 Start-Up

y When LSMs with millimeters and inch settings are mixed and all LSMs are of mm/in type

Select mm or in and click [Start] to launch LSMPAK with the unit set to the selected unit.
This also changes the unit setting all connected LSMs, and LSMs whose units have been changed
are restarted.
If LSMPAK measurement units have changed since the last connection, the following screen will
appear; click [OK].

● If communication with the LSM fails


When LSMPAK is started, the following error dialog appears if communication between the PC and the
LSM fails.

Check the LSM communication settings under [Communication settings].


For details on communication method settings, see "■ Communication method" on page C-20.

1 Click [Communication settings].


» The environmental settings screen is displayed.

2 Select [USB] or [Ethernet] in [Communication method] according to the usage situation.

3 If [Ethernet] is selected, set the IP address range.

4 Click [Save].

C-6 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 2 Start-Up

2.2 Exiting LSMPAK

IMPORTANT
Upon exiting LSMPAK, data in the measurement history is deleted. If you do not want to the data to be deleted,
save the measurement data before exiting.
For details on saving measurement data, see "5.4.3 Storage of Measured Values" on page C-110.

Click to exit LSMPAK.

C-7 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 2 Start-Up

2.3 Confirming Device Information


Information on LSMs connected to the PC can be viewed on the [Connected Device] screen.

■ How to check the [Connected Device] screen


Click [Connected Device] on the home screen to display the [Connected Device] screen.
Serial numbers, COM numbers, and model names can be verified in the [Connected Device] screen.

Tips
The optional IF modules allow LSMs and LSMPAK to be connected via Ethernet. For specific instructions, see
the individual IF module manuals.
"IF Module <EtherNet/IP> User's Manual" (separate document)
"IF Module <PROFINET> User's Manual" (separate document)
"IF Module <EtherCAT> User's Manual" (separate document)
"IF Module <CC-Link IE TSN> User's Manual" (separate document)

IMPORTANT
When using the IF module <EtherCAT>, connect the LSM and LSMPAK via USB. Ethernet connection cannot
be used.

■ Procedure for checking LSMs connected to the PC


Clicking on the [Connected Device] screen causes the [POWER] LED of the corresponding control-
ler to blink.
If you have multiple LSMs connected to your PC, this feature is useful for locating the LSM you want to
work with.

C-8 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3 Settings
Set the necessary items for measurement.
Follow the LSMPAK wizard and enter the settings.

Tips
When using multiple LSMs, set the calculation method on the calculation screen.
For details, see "3.5.1 Register Calculation" on page C-76.

3.1 Settings List

■ [Environmental setting] screen


The [Environmental setting] screen allows you to set the items listed in the table below.
For details, see "3.2 [Environmental setting] Screen" on page C-19.

Item Setting value Description


Language N/A Select the language to be used by LSMPAK.
Languages available are Japanese and En-
glish.
Communication meth- y USB (initial value) Either USB (USB virtual COM communication)
od y Ethernet or Ethernet can be selected as the method of
communication with the LSM or PLC.

Tips
When an IF module (optional) is attached to the
controller, Ethernet can be used.
IP address search y Start IP address You can search for connected LSMs by speci-
range y Search count fying the [Start IP Address] and [Search count].
LSMs found are displayed on the Home screen
and the [Connected Device] screen.
Unit y mm (initial value) Select the desired unit of measure. When this
y in setting is changed, the change is applied to all
connected controllers.
If an mm-only type controller is connected, the
"in" option is not displayed.
Number of digits af- N/A Set the desired number of decimal places.
ter the decimal point If the unit is millimeters, you can set from 1
through 5 decimal places (up to 0.00001); if
the unit is inches, you can set from 1 through 6
decimal places (up to 0.000001).

C-9 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

Item Setting value Description


Security function y Disable (initial value) Set the security function to enabled or dis-
y Enable abled.
When the security function is enabled, LSM-
PAK measurement settings, calculation set-
tings, etc. can be password-protected.
Setting and chang- N/A Set/change the password.
ing password Up to 20 characters can be set using half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Editing protection of N/A Lock/unlock editing of settings and arithmetic
settings and opera- operations.
tions

C-10 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ [Common setting 1] screen


In the [Common setting 1] screen, items in the table below can be set.
For details on each item, see "3.3.1 [Common setting 1] Screen" on page C-26.

Tips
• The [Common setting 1] screen includes combinations of settings that cannot be used at the same time. For
details, see "● Exclusivity of items in the [Common setting 1] screen" on page C-26.
• The settings made here change the measurement conditions of the parameter set.

Item Setting value Description


Transparent N/A Enable this setting when measuring workpieces with transpar-
mode ent bodies.
Detection meth- y Segment mode Select the area to be measured by the laser.
od (initial value)
y Edge mode
Ultra-fine wire N/A Enable this setting when measuring workpieces with ultra-fine
mode wires.

IMPORTANT
• Ultra-fine wires are measured using the LSM-02-A sensor. This
setting cannot be set in LSM-30-A.
• When measuring ultra-fine and transparent material (such as
glass fibers), the minute influence of transmitted light may affect
measured values. Prepare a master gage of the same nominal
diameter and transmittance as that of the workpiece to be mea-
sured and compare measurement results.
Two items mea- N/A Enable this setting when measuring two measurement items
surement at simultaneously (e.g., average OD and run-out).
Disable this setting when there is only one measurement item.
Auto-work de- y Disable (initial Select [Diameter detection] or [Position detection] when auto-
tection value) matically detecting the workpiece.
y Diameter detec-
When [Diameter detection] is selected, select 16 or 1 as the
tion
scanning rate.
Scanning rate
16 or 1
y Position detec-
tion
Scans for aver- y Arithmetical Select the method to be used averaging.
aging (method) average
(initial value)
y Moving average
Outlier Elimina- y Disable (initial Select [USE1] or [USE2] to exclude abnormal values from the
tion value) measurement data.
y USE1
y USE2
GO/NG judg- y Upper/ Select the method to be used judging GO/NG.
ment method Lower limit
(initial value)
y Multi-limits
y Target value
and tolerance

C-11 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ [Common setting 2] screen


In the [Common setting 2] screen, items in the table below can be set.
For details on each item, see "3.3.2 [Common setting 2] Screen" on page C-44.

Item Setting value Description


Output at no workpiece y 0V (initial value) Set the "E0008" analog output voltage
error y 5V (no workpiece error) when external de-
y -5V vices are connected to this product.
I/O RUN input y Single (initial value) Select the type of control (measurement
y Continuous run measurement execution method) to be performed by
with a specified period "RUN_IN_N" (pin 17) of the I/O con-
y Continuous run measurement nector.
STB/ACK output y STB (initial value) Select the I/O connector output signal.
y ACK

C-12 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ [Common setting 3] screen


In the [Common setting 3] screen, items in the table below can be set.
For details on each item, see "3.3.3 [Common setting 3] Screen" on page C-46.

Item Setting value Description


Extension function THL y Disable (initial value) Sets whether the edge detection level
settings y Enable (THL: signal level at which workpieces
0.00–5.00 (specifiable in 0.01
are detected) is to be used.
increments)
IMPORTANT
Changes in THL significantly impact mea-
surement accuracy.
Detect dirt on the glass y Disable (initial value) When enabled, the system detects dirt
y Enable on the protective glass.

IMPORTANT
When this function is enabled, the pro-
tective glass is checked for dirt at LSM
startup. Detection is not possible if there
is contamination with dirt, etc. during mea-
surement. To check for contamination,
remove the measurement workpiece and
afterward restart the LSM.
Set the STB length y MR (automatic) (initial value) Specify the STB length when using the
y 0.1 ms I/O analog interface of this product to
y 0.3 ms connect with an external device (com-
y 2.0 ms munication destination).
y 5.0 ms
y 10.0 ms
y 20.0 ms
y 50.0 ms
y 100.0 ms
Set the input software y 5.0 ms (initial value) Specify the filter length of input signals.
filter y 20.0 ms
y 2.0 ms
Setting the application range of calibration, preset/offset
Calibration y Separated for each parame- Set the applicable range for Calibration
ter set pair and Preset/Offset.
y Unified all the parameter set
(initial value) Tips
Preset/Offset y Separated for each parame- Cannot be set to a combination of [Sep-
ter set (initial value) arated for each parameter set pair.] for
y Unified all the parameter set [Calibration] and [Unified all the parame-
ter set.] for [Preset/Offset].

C-13 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ [Measurement condition 1] screen


The display and settings of the [Measurement condition 1] screen will change according to settings
made in the common settings.
For details, see "3.3.5 [Measurement condition 1] Screen" on page C-54.

● Pattern 1
When [Segment mode] is selected for the detection method in the [Common setting 1] screen, the pa-
rameters shown in the table below will be displayed.

Tips
• When an item other than [Other] is selected, [Segment], [No of sample measurement], and [Method] (calcu-
lation items) are selected automatically.
• When [Transparent mode] is enabled in the [Common setting 1] screen, [Gap (SEG1)] and [Gap (SEG3)] are
not displayed in the [Measurement condition 1] screen.
• If the segment number, number of samples, and calculation items set in [Other] are the same as items that
are pre-defined for settings such as [Outer diameter (segment 2)] and [Runout (SEG 1)], the relevant items
are automatically changed accordingly when the display is switched.
For example, if the following are set in [Other], [Outer diameter (SEG 2)] is set because it is the same condi-
tion as for [Outer diameter (SEG 2)].
− [Segment]: 2
− [No of sample measurement]: 1
− [Method]: Average
• If [No of sample measurement] is changed when [Two items measurement] is enabled, the [No of sample
measurement] setting for the paired parameter set will automatically be set to the same value.

Item Setting value Description


Outer diameter (SEG 2) Segment: 2 Specify segment 2 to set the outer diame-
(initial value) No of sample measurement: 1 ter measurement.
Method: Average
(Cannot be changed)
Runout (SEG1) Segment: 1 Specify segment 1 to set run-out mea-
No of sample measurement: If surement.
other than 1, the value remains
the same as before selection. If
1, changed to 0.
Method: Range
(Cannot be changed)
Runout (SEG3) Segment: 3 Specify segment 3 to set run-out mea-
No of sample measurement: If surement.
other than 1, the value remains
the same as before selection. If
1, changed to 0.
Method: Range
(Cannot be changed)

C-14 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

Item Setting value Description


Average OD Segment: 2 Set average measurement of outer diam-
No of sample measurement: If eter.
other than 1, the value remains
the same as before selection. If
1, changed to 0.
Method: Average
(Cannot be changed)
Roundness Segment: 2 Sets roundness measurement.
No of sample measurement: If
other than 1, the value remains
the same as before selection. If
1, changed to 0.
Method: Range
(Cannot be changed)
Cylindricity Segment: 2 Set cylindricity measurement.
No of sample measurement: If
other than 1, the value remains
the same as before selection. If
1, changed to 0.
Method: Range
(Cannot be changed)
Gap (SEG1) Segment: 1 Specify segment 1 to set gap measure-
No of sample measurement: 1 ment.
Method: Average
(Cannot be changed)
Gap (SEG3) Segment: 3 Specify segment 3 to set gap measure-
No of sample measurement: 1 ment.
Method: Average
(Cannot be changed)
Other N/A Set the segment(s), number of sample
measurement, and calculation items as
desired.
Segment 1–7 (initial value: 2) Specify a segment or segments.
When [Other] is selected, this item is
enabled.
Multiple segments can be specified simul-
taneously.

C-15 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

Item Setting value Description


Sample measurement
No of sample mea- 0–999 (initial value: 1) Set the number of sample measurement.
surement When number of sample measurement is
0: Zero-run measurement
When number of sample measurement is
1: Normal measurement
When number of sample measurement
is from 2 through 999: Sample measure-
ment.
Method y Average (initial value) Specify the calculation item for sample
y Maximum measurement.
y Minimum
This can be selected when the number of
y Range
sample measurement is from 2 through
999.
It cannot be selected when the number of
sample measurement is 1.

● Pattern 2
The parameters shown in the table below are displayed when [Edge Mode] is selected for the detection
method in the [Common setting 1] screen.

Setting item Setting value Description


Edge, manual N/A Set an arbitrary edge.
Edge mode
Start edge 1–254 (initial value: 2) Specify which edge to begin measurement
from.
End edge 2–255 (initial value: 3) Specify which edge to end measurement with.
Sample measurement Same as pattern 1.

C-16 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ [Measurement condition 2] screen


The display and settings of the [Measurement condition 2] screen will change according to settings
made in the common settings.
For details, see "3.3.6 [Measurement condition 2] Screen" on page C-59.

Item Setting value Description


Number of averaging (measurement interval)
Number of averaging 1–2048 (initial value: 1024) Specify the number of averaging.
(measurement interval)
Outlier Elimination*1
Upper lim. Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the upper limit for normal val-
+ five digits of decimal part ues.
(initial value: blank)
Lower lim. Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the lower limit for normal val-
+ five digits of decimal part ues.
(initial value: blank)
Count val. 1–100 Set the allowed number of measured
(initial value: 1) values outside the normal range (ab-
normal values). When the number of
abnormal values reaches the number
set, an outlier detection warning is
displayed.

Tips
For details on the outlier detection warn-
ing, see "1 Error Messages and Solu-
tions" on page F-1 in "PART F Trouble-
shooting".
GO/NG judge*2
Upper/Lower limit
Upper lim. Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the upper limit for GO/NG
+ five digits of decimal part judgment.
(initial value: blank)
Lower lim. Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the lower limit for GO/NG judg-
+ five digits of decimal part ment.
(initial value: blank)
Multi-limits
Ranges 3–7 Set the number of rows for GO/NG
judgment.
Thresholds Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the range values for each re-
(L1 to L6) + five digits of decimal part gion.
(initial value: blank)
Target value
Target value Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the target value for GO/NG
+ five digits of decimal part judgment.
(initial value: blank)
Upper tol. Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the upper tolerance of the
+ five digits of decimal part target value.
(initial value: blank)
Lower tol. Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the lower tolerance of the target
+ five digits of decimal part value.
(initial value: blank)

C-17 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

Item Setting value Description


Analog out*2
Reference value Sign + two digits of integer part Set the reference value used when
+ five digits of decimal part the difference between the reference
(initial value: blank) value and the measured value and the
reference value is output to an external
device via the I/O analog interface.
Scale 1–5 Specify the reference value for scale
(initial value: 1) values (gain).
Auto-work detection*2
No. of meas. 1–999 (initial value: blank) When enabling automatic detection,
(scanning rate) specify the scanning rate to perform to
check whether a workpiece has entered
the measurement area.
Invalid time (ms) 1–9999 (initial value: blank) Specify the length of time from when
a workpiece is detected to the start of
measurement (invalid time).
Upper lim. Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the upper limit for detection.
+ five digits of decimal part
(initial value: blank)
Lower lim. Sign + two digits of integer part Specify the lower limit for detection.
+ five digits of decimal part
(initial value: blank)

*1 ‌If both the upper and lower limits are blank, this function is disabled.
*2 ‌If all input fields are blank, this function is disabled.

C-18 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.2 [Environmental setting] Screen


Items below are set in the [Environmental setting] screen.
y Language
y Communication method
y Unit
y Number of digits after the decimal point
y Security function

IMPORTANT
If the power is turned off in the middle of setup, the contents of the settings will not be saved.
We recommend that you write your settings down.

1 Click [Environmental setting] ( ) in LSMPAK.

» The [Environmental setting] screen is displayed.

C-19 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

2 Set items in the environmental settings.

Language

Communication method

Unit

Security function

① ②

No. Description
① Cancels editing and closes the [Environmental setting] screen.
② Saves the settings to LSMPAK.

■ Language
Select the language to be used by LSMPAK.
Select a language from the drop-down list.
Languages available are Japanese and English.

■ Communication method
Either USB or Ethernet can be selected as the communication method.

Tips
To edit the IP address, subnet mask, etc. on the [Connected Device] screen, connect the PC and LSM via USB
and select [USB].

● When [USB] is selected


Communication with the LSM is via USB.

Tips
• To edit IP addresses, etc., select [USB].
• If you will be using Ethernet, first do device setup via USB.

C-20 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

● When [Ethernet] is selected


Communication with the LSM is via Ethernet.
Communicating LSMs are detected using the [IP address search range].

Tips
For communication via Ethernet, device settings must first be made via USB.

1 Select [Ethernet] in [Communication method].

2 Enter a range of IP addresses for connected controllers in the [Start IP Address] and [Search
count] fields.

3 Click [Save].
» A dialog box is displayed prompting for LSMPAK to be restarted.

■ Unit
You can select the unit of measure for LSMs.

IMPORTANT
Changing the unit will cause the controller to restart. Please note that measurement data is be cleared upon
restarting.

Tips
• This item appears only if all connected controllers are the "mm/in" type. It does not appear if a mm-only type
controller is included.
• When the unit of measure is changed, the change is applied to all connected controllers.

C-21 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

● Number of digits after the decimal point


Sets the number of decimal places for values measured.
If the unit is millimeters, you can set from 1 through 5 decimal places (up to 0.00001); if the unit is inch-
es, you can set from 1 through 6 decimal places (up to 0.000001).
Click [▼] or [▲] to set the desired number of digits.

Tips
The number of decimal places setting only applies to display of measured and idle values in measurement and
calculation lists.
The number of digits displayed in locations where numeric values are input or displayed for setting information,
measurement history, calibration, preset, and offset are fixed as indicated below.
• With mm: 5 decimal places
• With in: 6 decimal places

■ Security function
You can either enable or disable the security function.
To enable the security function, set a password.
The security function is mainly used to enable/disable editing of items configured in LSMPAK.

Item Description
Enable y You can set or change the password. You can also set a blank
password.
y You can select edit lock or edit unlock for [Editing protection of
settings and operations].
Disable [Editing protection of settings and operations] is not available.

Tips
• The password is set to blank at the factory.
• If you forget the password, you can clear it by reinstalling LSMPAK.

● Setting and changing password


You can set a password.
Up to 20 characters can be set using half-width alphanumeric characters and symbols. (Both upper and
lower case alphanumeric characters may be used.)
Enter the current and new passwords in the password fields and click OK to set the password. An error
message appears if the information entered is missing or incomplete.

C-22 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

If the security function is enabled, you will be asked to enter a password when configuring the following
settings.
Screen Item
Connected Device [Edit device information]
Measurement list [Register calculation]
Detail screen
[Setting information] tab [Edit settings], [Open setting file], [Initialization]
[Memorize light amount] tab [Automatic adjustment], [Memorize light amount]
[Calibration] tab [Disable calibration], [1 point calibration], [2 points
calibration]
[Preset/Offset] tab [Cancel Preset], [Preset settings], [Offset remove],
[Offset settings]
Environmental [Unit] (mm/in type only), [Security function] > [Disable], [Editing protection of
setting settings and operations] > [Edit unlock]

Tips
• The password is set to blank at the factory.
• If you forget the password, you can clear it by reinstalling LSMPAK.

● Editing protection of settings and operations


You can restrict who can edit LSMPAK settings.

Item Description
Edit lock (requires password y Disables editing of measurement settings (common settings and
input when editing) parameter settings), calculation settings, etc. Settings are view-
able.
y If you set edit lock, you will be prompted to enter a password
when editing a setting.
Edit unlock Allows editing and viewing of measurement settings, calculation
settings, etc.

Tips
• Password entry is required when changing from [Edit lock (password required for editing)] to [Edit unlock].
• Even when [Edit unlock] is selected, LSMPAK automatically switches to [Edit lock (password required for
editing)] after restarting.
• The factory setting is [Edit lock (requires password input when editing)].

C-23 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3 Measurement Settings


After the environmental settings have been configured, configure the measurement settings.
Edit any of the measurement settings. (These includes initial values, so edit them to suit your applica-
tion.)

IMPORTANT
If the power is turned off in the middle of setup, the contents of the settings will not be saved.
We recommend that you write your settings down.

1 Click [Detail] in the measurement information.

» The detail screen is displayed.

Tips
If an error occurs on a connected device as shown in the figure below (where a red line appear to the left of the
device name), it indicates that device settings have not been completed on the LSM.

Complete the device settings before making any measurement settings.


For details about the device settings, see "6.2 Advanced Measurement" on page C-126 in "PART B Prepara-
tion".

C-24 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

2 Editing label names (optional)

IMPORTANT
When using with multiple LSMs connected, assign a different label to each LSM. If the same label is set for
multiple LSMs, registration of calculations may not be performed correctly.

1 Click in the [Label] input field.

» The label editing screen is displayed.

2 Enter the label.


3 Click [OK].

Tips
Labels can include up to 13 half-width alphanumeric characters (uppercase only) and underscore charac-
ters.

3 Click [Edit settings].

» The [Common setting 1] screen is displayed. ( "3.3.1 [Common setting 1] Screen" on page C-26)

Tips
If the security function is enabled in the [Environmental setting] screen, a password entry dialog is displayed. In
this case, the [Common setting 1] screen is displayed after password authentication.

4 Proceed to follow the wizard from "3.3.1 [Common setting 1] Screen" to "3.3.7 [Check settings]
Screen".

C-25 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.1 [Common setting 1] Screen


The [Common setting 1] screen is used to set items related to the workpiece and measurement location.
The settings made here change the measurement conditions of the parameter set.

"■ Transparent mode"


"■ Detection method"
"■ Ultra-fine wire mode"
"■ Two items measurement"

"■ [Auto-work detection] (method


and scanning rate settings)"
"■ Scans for averaging (method
setting)"
"■ Outlier elimination (count target
setting)"
"■ GO/NG judgment method"

① ② ③
No. Description
① Returns display to the detail screen.
② Continues to the [Common setting 2] screen.
③ Continues to the [Edit parameter set] screen.

● Exclusivity of items in the [Common setting 1] screen


The [Common setting 1] screen includes combinations of settings that cannot be used at the same time.

Two Au-
Trans- Ultra-fine Outlier
Edge items to-Work Moving
parent wire Elimina-
Mode measure- Detec- average
mode mode tion
ment tion
Transparent mode — P P P P P
Edge Mode — — — P P P
Ultra-fine wire mode P — — — P P
Two items measure-
P — — — — —
ment
Auto-Work Detection P P — — — P
Moving average P P P — — P
Outlier Elimination P P P — P P
P: Available combination
—: Unavailable combination

C-26 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Transparent mode
To measure transparent workpieces such as glass tubes, optical fibers, and films, enable [Transparent
mode] in the common settings.
Since a workpiece made of transparent material allows a portion of light to pass through, the way a seg-
ment (the dark laser irradiation shadow of the workpiece and the bright laser-irradiated portion ) is gen-
erated differs from that for an opaque workpiece, such as steel material, as shown in the figure below.
In such case, the segment can be corrected by enabling [Transparent mode] to ensure accurate mea-
surements.

Measurement example
"■ Measuring the outer diameter of transparent round bars" on page C-126

Tips
When [Transparent mode] is enabled, [Edge Mode] cannot be selected for detection method. Also, [Segment]
can only be set from 1 through 3. If it is set to 4 or higher, it is automatically changed to 2.

[Transparent mode] [Transparent mode]


Disable Enable
Direction of laser scanning
Segment 1 Segment 1
Segment 2
Workpiece
(transparent Segment 3 Segment 2
object)
Segment 4

Segment 5 Segment 3

Edge detection level (THL)

Light-receiving signal

IMPORTANT
When measuring ultra-fine and transparent material (such as glass fibers), the minute influence of transmitted
light may affect measured values. Prepare a master gage of the same nominal diameter and transmittance as
that of the workpiece to be measured and compare measurement results.

C-27 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Detection method
The detection method can be either "segment" or "edge".
"Segments" are areas that are demarcated as light and dark parts of the workpiece that result from laser
scanning.
"Edges" are the boundaries between highlights and shadows of the workpiece that result from laser
scanning.
Segments and edges are each numbered and managed as shown in the figure below.
Specifying a segment number is referred to as "segment mode", and specifying an edge number is
referred to as "edge mode".
Select [Segment mode] or [Edge mode] according to your application.

Tips
• When [Transparent mode] or [Ultra-fine wire mode] is enabled, [Edge Mode] cannot be selected.
• [Edge Mode] and [Two items measurement] cannot be used at the same time.

Segment number Edge number


Highlight Edge 1
Segment 1 Highlight 1
1 Edge 2
Shadow Shadow 1
Segment 2
Direction of laser scanning

Direction of laser scanning

1 Edge 3
Highlight 2
Highlight Edge 4
Segment 3
2 Shadow 2
Shadow Edge 5
Segment 4
2
Highlight
Segment 5
3
Highlight 127
Shadow Edge 254
Segment 6
3 Shadow 127
Highlight Edge 255
Segment 7 Highlight 128
4 Edge 256

● Segment mode
With segment mode, up to 4 highlights and 3 shadows can be measured.
Segment numbers are specified from 1 through 7.

Items to be set for each parameter set


Segment number
"■ Segment mode" on page C-56

Measurement example
Basic measurements "6.1.1 Outer Diameter Measurements" on page C-113, "6.1.2 Gap
Measurement" on page C-115, "6.1.3 Run-Out Measurement" on page
C-116, "6.1.4 Thickness Measurement" on page C-118
Advanced measurement "6.2.4 Ultra-Fine Wire Measurements" on page C-132

C-28 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

● Edge mode
With edge mode, up to 128 highlights and 127 shadows can be measured.
Edges are specified as numbers from 1 through 256.
Since a workpiece consisting of a transparent object cannot be measured by edge mode, it is measured
by segment mode.

Items to be set for each parameter set


y Start edge number
y End edge number

For details, see "■ Edge mode" on page C-56.

Measurement example
"6.1.1 Outer Diameter Measurements" on page C-113

■ Ultra-fine wire mode


When measuring ultra-fine wires with diameters smaller than ø0.05, enable [Ultra-fine wire mode].
Since ultra-fine wires are thinner than the laser beam diameter at the focal point, the laser beam is not
completely blocked (occulted) and a clear edge signal is not obtained.
This LSM can measure workpieces that are thinner than the laser beam diameter by varying the edge
detection level (THL) according to the size of the workpiece using a special algorithm based on slight
variations in the obtained light-receiving signal.

Ultra-fine wire measurement is available by connecting LSM-02-A. Ultra-fine wire measurement is not
available with LSM-30-A.
When the LSM-02-A is connected, the measuring range (range of guaranteed accuracy) changes as
follows, depending on the ultra-fine wire measurement settings:
y When [Ultra-fine wire mode] is enabled: 0.005 mm–2 mm
y When [Ultra-fine wire mode] is disabled: 0.05 mm–2 mm

Measurement example
"6.2.4 Ultra-Fine Wire Measurements" on page C-132

C-29 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

Restrictions
When [Ultra-fine wire mode] is enabled, restrictions apply to the following items.

Item Restrictions
Measurement interval When using ultra-fine wire measurement, THL is adjusted at the start of mea-
surement, so the first measurement time is about 0.02 seconds longer than
the set measurement interval.
y Single run measurement: measurement interval + approx. 0.02 sec.
y Continuous run measurement: measurement interval + approx. 0.02 sec-
onds for the first measurement, and normal measurement interval for the
second and subsequent measurements
Number of averaging Set to 16–2048 times.
Values from 1 through 8 cannot be set (normally 1 through 2048 times).
Measurement posi- y Only [Segment mode] can be used as the detection method.
tion y If multiple segments are set within one parameter set, the measuring range
starts from 0.1 mm.
y When measuring a workpiece of 0.1 mm or less, only use one segment.
Other y [Two items measurement] and [Auto-Work Detection] cannot be set. In
addition, only [Segment mode] can be used as the detection method.
y For a fine gap measurement, the laser beam intensity is insufficient for
stable measurement. Be sure to memorize the light intensity with no jigs or
workpieces.
"6.2.12 Measurement of Narrow Gaps" on page C-149
y When measuring ultra-fine and transparent material (such as glass fibers),
the minute influence of transmitted light may affect measured values. Pre-
pare a master gage of the same nominal diameter and transmittance as
that of the workpiece to be measured and compare measurement results.

C-30 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Two items measurement


One LSM measures two (2) measurement items simultaneously.
Parameter sets are set for each measurement item.
To perform two items measurement, enable [Two items measurement].
If not enabled, [One item measurement] is set.

Measurement example
"6.2.9 Two Items Measurement of Outer Diameter and Run-Out of Rubber Roll (Sample Measure-
ment)" on page C-142

Tips
• The following items cannot be used together with [Two items measurement].
– [Edge Mode]
– [Ultra-fine wire mode]
– [Auto-work detection]
– [Moving average]
• If [Two items measurement] is set, two parameter sets are paired. The paired parameter set combinations
are as follows.
– 0 and 5
– 1 and 6
– 2 and 7
– 3 and 8
– 4 and 9
– 10 and 15
– 11 and 16
– 12 and 17
– 13 and 18
– 14 and 19
• When [Two items measurement] is enabled, [Number of averaging] and [No of sample measurement] of
paired parameter sets are automatically set to the same valued.
For example, if you change [No of sample measurement] in parameter set 0 from 1 to 2, the number of sam-
ples in paired parameter set 5 will also be automatically changed to 2.

C-31 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ [Auto-work detection] (method and scanning rate settings)


[Auto-work detection] is a function that allows an LSM to automatically detect and measure a workpiece
when it comes within the set detection range (between the lower and upper detection limits).
It automatically detects workpieces entering the measuring position from outside the set detection range
(outside the lower and upper detection limits) and repeats the specified number of measurements.

Measure- No workpiece Invalid time Specified number


Workpiece detected
ment start detected passed of measurements

To automatically detect workpieces, enable [Auto-work detection].


After enabling, set the detection method and scanning rate.

Item Description Setting value Remarks


Detection meth- Select the detection method. Diameter de- Initial value:
od "● Diameter detection" on page C-33, tection Diameter detection
"● Position detection method" on Position detec-
page C-34 tion
Detection speed Select the detection speed (scanning rate). 1 time Initial value: 16 times
16 times
Tips
• To detect a precise workpiece, it is recom-
mended that you select [16 times].
• If the position detection method is selected,
you can only select [1 time].

Items to be set for each parameter set


y No. of meas.
y Invalid time
y Upper limit of detection range
y Lower limit of detection range

For details, see "■ Auto-work detection (set individually)" on page C-65.

Measurement example
"6.2.10 Outer Diameter Measurement of Shaft Processed with a Centerless Grinder (Auto-Work
Detection Function)" on page C-145

Tips
The following items cannot be used at together with [Auto-work detection].
• [Ultra-fine wire mode]
• [Two items measurement]
• [Moving average]

C-32 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

● Diameter detection
When the workpiece enters the laser scanning plane perpendicularly, it is automatically detected and
measured.
y To detect a workpiece, the measured value after calibration and preset correction is used.
y Starting from a state with no workpiece, after a workpiece with a surface that falls within the set
detection range (between the upper and lower detection limits) is detected and the invalid time
elapses, measurement is repeated the specified number of times. After the specified number of
measurements, the final measurement result is latched and displayed. Once measurement is start-
ed, the upper and lower detection limits will no longer be checked.
y Either [1 (time)] or [16 (times)] can be selected as the speed for workpiece detection. Use [16
(times)] if connecting bars are used between workpieces as feeding convenience to set appropriate
intervals between workpieces, and the difference in the outer diameter between the workpieces
and the bars is insufficient or if the feed rate is low.
y An example configuration of workpieces is shown in the diagram below.

c g
Scanning beam

D a

Workpiece movement V (mm/s)

Item Setting value Remarks


Detection speed 16 times One time may be enough for
(scanning rate) detection. Use 16 times if pre-
cise detection is required, such
as for small chamfers.
Upper detection H > Upper measuring range limit, or 1.1 × D Specifying either only the upper
limit limit or only the lower limit is
Lower detection L < (D + a) / 2 enough for detection.
limit
Invalid time T > (c / V) ms
No. of Meas. N < (l - 2 × c) × 0.8 (Safety factor) / Measure- Normally one time is used.
ment interval / V

C-33 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

● Position detection method


When the workpiece enters the laser scanning plane horizontally from the scanning direction, it is auto-
matically detected and measured.
y The scan speed (scanning rate) for workpiece detection is fixed at 1 time. 16 times cannot be spec-
ified (it is ignored even if specified).
y The preset correction is not applied to the upper and lower detection limits.
y Starting from a state with no workpiece, after the edge of a workpiece that falls within the set
detection range (between the upper and lower detection limits) is detected and the invalid time
elapses, measurement is repeated the specified number of times. However, once measurement is
started, the upper and lower detection limits will no longer be checked.
y An example configuration is described in the diagram below.
Workpiece positions (a) and (b) are judged as no workpiece, and (c) is judged as that a workpiece
is present.

Detection edge

(a)
Lower detection

Direction of laser scanning


Upper detection limit: L (b)

Laser scanning range


Measurement region
limit: H
Detection range: C
(c)

V mm/s

Item Setting value Remarks


Detection speed 1 time You can only select 1 time.
(scanning rate)
Upper detection H < (Laser scanning range + Measurement Specifying either only the upper
limit region) / 2 - D limit or only the lower limit is
Lower detection L > (Laser scanning range - Measurement enough for detection.
limit region) / 2 - D
Invalid time T=0
No. of Meas. N=1 For position detection, 1 time.

C-34 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Scans for averaging (method setting)


The LSM uses a laser to scan the workpiece 3,200 times per second and then averages these scans
to obtain measurement data. Stable measurement data can be obtained by setting the number of aver-
aging to a large number (collecting a large number of samples and calculating representative values),
although it takes more time to measure.
You can select either [Simple average] or [Moving average] as the method for averaging measurement
data.
Averaged and calculated as a single measurement value

3200 scans
1 scan (1 second)
(0.0003125 seconds)

Items to be set for each parameter set


Number of averaging
"■ Number of averaging (measurement interval)" on page C-60

Measurement example
"6.2.3 Measuring Fast-Moving Wires" on page C-131

Tips
[Moving average] cannot be used together with the following items.
• [Two items measurement]
• [Auto-work detection]

● Arithmetical average
When the number of sample measurement is 1
When measuring the outside diameter of a moving workpiece using arithmetic averaging, measurement
values are output in the area divided according to the set number of averaging (the area of measure-
ment values 1, 2, ......n for each part of the workpiece).
For example, when the number of averaging is set to 1024, measurement results are obtained at inter-
vals of 0.32 seconds.

Calculation formula
Measurement interval (seconds) = number of scans x time for one scan
0.32 = 1024 x 0.0003125
Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value n

Moving workpiece
Output Output Output

C-35 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

When the number of sample measurement is 2


When the number of sample measurement is set to 2 for arithmetical averaging, the first sampling and
the second sampling are calculated, and calculated values (displayed values) 1, 2, and 3......n are calcu-
lated for each part. The time required to obtain one calculated value (displayed value) is determined by
the set number of averaging.
For example, when the number of averaging is set to 1024 and the number of sample measurement is
set to 2, calculated values (displayed values) are obtained at intervals of 0.64 seconds.

Calculation formula
Measurement interval (seconds) = (number of scans x time for one scan) x number of sample measure-
ment
0.64=(1024×0.0003125) x 2
Calculated (dis- Calculated (dis- Calculated (dis-
played) value 1 played) value 2 played) value n

Second Second Second


First sampling First sampling First sampling
sampling sampling sampling

Moving workpiece
Output Output Output

For the relationship of measurement interval (measurement time) between the number of averaging and
the arithmetical average, see "■ Number of averaging (measurement interval)" on page C-60.

IMPORTANT
Setting the number of averaging to a higher number improves repeatability.
If there is enough time available for measurement, set the number of averaging to a higher number.

C-36 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

● Moving average
When the number of sample measurement is 1
Even if the set number of averaging is the same as for arithmetic averaging, moving averages can be
calculated in parallel (moving averages in which the range to be averaged is shifted 16 times each) for
each further subdivided part of measurement 1, 2, ......n. With the arithmetical average, because the
measured value is updated for each scan for averaging, the required time is determined by the number
of averaging. With the moving average, the measurement interval (measurement time) is shortened
because averaging is performed with the above method. This allows measurement results with a small
amount of change to be obtained for workpieces whose outer diameter changes, enabling quick detec-
tion of trends in outer diameter change in the workpiece.
For example, if the number of averaging is 1024, initial measurement value 1 takes 0.32 seconds (time
required when the number of averaging is 1024), but results for measurement value 2 and on are ob-
tained at intervals of 0.005 seconds (time for a number of averaging of 16).
This makes moving averages suitable for observing minute variations in measured values (such as wire
drawing machines for electrical lines and feedback control of extruding machines).
Measured value 2 Measured value n

Measured value 1 0.005s Measured value (n-1)

Moving workpiece
Output Output
Output Output
When the number of sample measurement is 2
When the number of sample measurement is set to 2 for moving average, calculated (displayed) value
1 is calculated when the first sampling and the second sampling both become available. For calculated
(displayed) value 2 and on, the interval at which the measurement result is calculated changes accord-
ing to the set number of sample measurement.
For example, if the number of averaging is set to 1024 and the number of sample measurement is set to
2, calculated (displayed) value 1 requires 0.32 seconds (time for the set number of averaging of 1024) +
0.005 seconds (time for the set number of averaging of 16), or 0.325 seconds. If the number of samples
is set to 3, an additional 0.005 seconds (for a set number of averaging of 16) is added.
Calculated (displayed) values 2 and on take 0.005 seconds (for a set number of averaging of 16) x the
number of sample measurement. In other words, calculated (displayed) values 2 and on are obtained at
intervals of 0.01 seconds (0.005 x 2) when the number of sample measurement is 2, and at intervals of
0.015 seconds (0.005 x 3) when the number of sample measurement is 3.
Calculated (displayed) value 2 Calculated (displayed) value n

Calculated (displayed) value 1 0.01 seconds Calculated (displayed) value (n-1)


Second sampling
First sampling

Moving workpiece
Output Output
Output Output

For the relationship of measurement interval (measurement time) between the number of averaging and
the moving average, see "■ Number of averaging (measurement interval)" on page C-60.

C-37 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

IMPORTANT
• For moving averages, the number of averaging can only be set to 32 or more.
• Setting the number of averaging to a higher number improves repeatability.
If there is enough time available for measurement, set the number of averaging to a higher number.

C-38 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Outlier elimination (count target setting)


[Outlier Elimination] is a function for determining whether a measured value is a normal value or an
abnormal value. By setting upper and lower limits for normal values, measurement values outside the
range can be excluded as abnormal values. If value is determined to be abnormal, its data will not be
displayed or output.

Judgment Judgment conditions


Abnormal values (exclusion target) Measured value < Lower limit value
Normal value Lower limit value ≤ Measured value ≤
Upper limit value
Abnormal values (exclusion target) Upper limit value < Measured value

Applications suited to [Outlier Elimination]


Control of grindstone feed for centerless grinders, etc.
If the grindstone of a centerless grinder is controlled based on the measured data from the LSM, a large
measurement error could occur due to foreign matter, such as from coolant, adhered to the workpiece.
As shown in the figure, if foreign matter (with a height of h) adheres to the workpiece (diameter D) within
the averaging region L, an abnormal outer diameter in the region of l is created, the displayed measured
value will be (D + lh / L). As a result, control of the grinder is temporarily influenced by the error.
L

l
h

Workpiece D Workpiece Workpiece

Workpiece movement

You can use this function to exclude clearly abnormal measured values generated due to the foreign
matter that adheres to the grindstone, allowing proper control of feeding of the grindstone.

Items to be set for each parameter set


y Upper lim.
y Lower lim.
y Count val.
For details, see "■ Outlier elimination" on page C-62.

● USE1
Measurement is performed until the measured values within the upper and lower limits reach the value
set in [No of sample measurement] (C-57 page) on the [Measurement condition 1] screen, and only
measured values within the range are calculated and displayed as measurement results.

C-39 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

● USE2
The number of measurements set in [No of sample measurement] (C-57 page) on the [Measurement
condition 1] screen is performed, and only measured values that are within the upper and lower limits
are calculated and displayed as measurement results. However, in the case of a single measurement,
measurement continues until a measurement value within the upper and lower limits is obtained.

Tips
When the number of measured values outside the upper and lower limits (abnormal values) reaches the num-
ber set in [Count val.], an outlier detection warning is displayed.
For details on the outlier detection warning, see "1 Error Messages and Solutions" on page F-1 in "PART
F Troubleshooting".

■ GO/NG judgment method


Select the method of GO/NG judgment of the measurement results.
There are three methods of determining GO/NG judgment: [Upper/Lower limit], [Multi-limits], and [Target
value and tolerance]. (The initial value is [Upper/Lower limit].)
For details on each of the GO/NG judgment methods, see "● Upper/Lower limit" on page C-40,
"● Multi-limits" on page C-41, "● Target value and tolerance" on page C-43.

Items to be set for each parameter set


• When [Upper/Lower limit] is selected: Upper and lower limits
• When [Multi-limits] is selected: Values from L1 through L6
• When [Target value and tolerance] is selected: Target value, upper tolerance, lower tolerance
For details, see "■ GO/NG judgment" on page C-63.

Measurement example
"6.2.2 Outer Diameter Measurement of Precision-Machined Product" on page C-130

IMPORTANT
In case of continuous measurement with a short measurement interval, the GO/NG judgment result (GO/NG)
may be displayed only momentarily or may be thinned out or hidden. To be sure about the GO/NG result for
each measurement, check the measurement history.

● Upper/Lower limit
Perform GO/NG judgment for measurement results by specifying an upper limit and a lower limit.
The GO/NG judgment results are displayed as GO (pass), +NG (fail - exceeded the upper limit) and -NG
(fail - exceeded the lower limit).

C-40 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

GO/NG judgment display


When an upper limit and lower limit are specified, the GO/NG judgment is displayed in LSMPAK as
shown below.

GO/NG judg-
GO/NG judgment conditions Example of LSMPAK display
ment
-NG Measured value < Lower limit value

OK Lower limit value ≤ Measured value ≤ Up-


per limit value

+NG Upper limit value < Measured value

● Multi-limits
Two to six thresholds are set and three to seven ranges (ranges) are used to determine GO/NG judg-
ment.
The GO/NG judgment is displayed in LSMPAK as shown below.

When thresholds L1–L6 are set

GO/NG judgment Range GO/NG judgment conditions Example of LSMPAK display


-NG R1 Measured value < L1

OK R2 L1 ≤ Measured value < L2


R3 L2 ≤ Measured value < L3
R4 L3 ≤ Measured value ≤ L4
R5 L4 < Measured value ≤ L5
R6 L5 < Measured value ≤ L6
+NG R7 L6 < Measured value

When thresholds L1–L5 are set

GO/NG judgment Range GO/NG judgment conditions Example of LSMPAK display


-NG R1 Measured value < L1

OK R2 L1 ≤ Measured value < L2


R3 L2 ≤ Measured value < L3
R4 L3 ≤ Measured value ≤ L4
R5 L4 < Measured value ≤ L5
+NG R6 L5 < Measured value

C-41 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

When thresholds L1–L4 are set

GO/NG judgment Range GO/NG judgment conditions Example of LSMPAK display


-NG R1 Measured value < L1

OK R2 L1 ≤ Measured value < L2


R3 L2 ≤ Measured value ≤ L3
R4 L3 < Measured value ≤ L4
+NG R5 L4 < Measured value

When thresholds L1–L3 are set

GO/NG judgment Range GO/NG judgment conditions Example of LSMPAK display


-NG R1 Measured value < L1

OK R2 L1 ≤ Measured value < L2


R3 L2 ≤ Measured value ≤ L3

+NG R4 L3 < Measured value

When thresholds L1–L2 are set

GO/NG judgment Range GO/NG judgment conditions Example of LSMPAK display


-NG R1 Measured value < L1

OK R2 L1 ≤ Measured value ≤ L2

+NG R3 L2 < Measured value

C-42 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

● Target value and tolerance


Perform GO/NG judgment for measurement results by specifying a target value and tolerance.
The GO/NG judgment results are displayed as GO (pass), +NG (fail - exceeded the upper limit) and -NG
(fail - exceeded the lower limit).

GO/NG judgment display


When a target value and tolerance are specified, the GO/NG judgment is displayed in LSMPAK as
shown below.

GO/NG judgment GO/NG judgment conditions Example of LSMPAK display


-NG Measured value <
(Target value + Lower tolerance)

OK (Target value + Lower tolerance) ≤


Measured value ≤
(Target value + Upper tolerance)

+NG (Target value + Upper tolerance) <


Measured value

C-43 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.2 [Common setting 2] Screen


The [Common setting 2] screen sets items related to output of measurement data.
The measurement conditions of the parameter set change according to contents of the common set-
tings.

"■ Output at no workpiece


error"
"■ I/O RUN input"

"■ STB/ACK output"

① ② ③

No. Description
① Displays the settings for [Common setting 1].
② Returns to the [Common setting 1] screen.
③ Continues to the [Common setting 3] screen.

C-44 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Output at no workpiece error


Used when this product is connected to an external device.
Select the analog output voltage for error "E0008" (no workpiece error).
Select from 0V, 5V, or -5V. (The initial value is 0V.)

■ I/O RUN input


Select the type of control (measurement execution method) to be performed by "RUN_IN_N" (pin 17) of
the I/O connector.
Select from [Single], [Continuous with term], or [Continuous]. (The initial value is [Single-run].)

Tips
The setting of this item does not affect the following controls.
• LSMPAK
• Command (USB virtual COM communication, general-purpose Ethernet TCP communication)
• PROFINET
• EtherNet/IP
• EtherCAT

■ STB/ACK output
Select the I/O connector output signal.
Select from [STB] (strobe) and [ACK] (acknowledgement signal). (The initial value is [STB].)
For details on signals, see "3.2.4 Timing Charts" on page D-35 in "PART D Interfaces".

Tips
The setting of this item does not affect the following controls.
• LSMPAK
• Command (USB virtual COM communication, general-purpose Ethernet TCP communication)
• PROFINET
• EtherNet/IP
• EtherCAT

C-45 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.3 [Common setting 3] Screen


The [Common setting 3] screen is used to set items related to extended functions.

"■ Extension function THL settings"

"■ Detect dirt on the protection glass"


"■ Set the STB length"

"■ Set the input software filter"

"■ Setting the application range of


calibration, preset/offset"

① ② ③

No. Description
① Displays the settings for [Common setting 1], and [Common setting 2].
② Returns to the [Common setting 2] screen.
③ Continues to the [Edit parameter set] screen.

■ Extension function THL settings


The edge detection level (THL) is the signal level at which the workpiece is detected.
When measuring the width of a transparent film or sheet, the workpiece may be difficult to detect.
In such cases, set this item to [Enable] and change THL to an appropriate value (the initial setting is
[Disable]).

Item Description Setting value Remarks


Enable THL is used. 0 V–5.00 V
(In 0.01 V increments)
(Initial value: 0.00 V)
Disable THL is not used. N/A Initial value

IMPORTANT
• Changing THL will affect measurement accuracy.
Change carefully when required.
• If THL is changed, measurement accuracy may be reduced because the measurement value can easily vary
depending on the condition of the end face edge. After changing THL, be sure to execute calibration.

C-46 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

Tips
The measurement error may be reduced by making the end face shape of the calibration master the same as
that of the workpiece.

THL configuration is explained using the example below. The following example pertains to measure-
ment of a transparent object.

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Make settings according to intended use.
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Set a reference workpiece, connect an oscilloscope to this product, and observe the received
light signal.

For details on how to observe the light-receiving signal, see "3.1 I/O Specifications" on page D-23 in "PART
D Interfaces".

3 When you obtain a light-receiving signal as illustrated below, apply V1 and V2 values read from
the light-receiving signal to the following formula to calculate the appropriate THL.
Calculation formula: "Appropriate THL" = (V1+V2)/2 [V]
Light-receiving signal

Direction of laser scanning


V1
V1: ‌Light-receiving signal peak voltage
V2: ‌Higher voltage side (smaller shaded side)
of both edges
V2
Workpiece
(transparent object)

Appropriate THL
THL when [Disable] is selected

4 Enter the value calculated in step 3 in the THL setting field.

C-47 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Detect dirt on the protection glass


When [Detect dirt on the protection glass] is enabled, LSMPAK displays "E0007" (dirt detection error) if
the protective glass of the sensor is dirty when the LSM is started.

IMPORTANT
When this function is enabled, the protective glass is checked for dirt at LSM startup. Detection is not possible
if there is contamination with dirt, etc. during measurement. To check for contamination, remove the measure-
ment workpiece and afterward restart the LSM.

Item Description Remarks


Enable Contamination of the protective glass is detected.
Disable Contamination of the protective glass is not detected. Initial value

■ Set the STB length


Set the STB length when connecting this product to an external device (communication destination)
using the I/O analog interface.
Select any setting value from the drop-down list.

Setting value Remarks


MR (automatic) Initial value
0.1 ms
0.3 ms
2.0 ms
5.0 ms
10.0 ms
20.0 ms
50.0 ms
100.0 ms

■ Set the input software filter


When connecting this product to an external device (communication destination) using the I/O analog
interface, select the filter length for the input signal.

Setting value Remarks


5.0 ms Initial value
20.0 ms
2.0 ms

C-48 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Setting the application range of calibration, preset/offset


Set the applicable range for Calibration, Preset, and Offset.

Item Description Remarks


Calibration Separated for each Set calibration for each parameter set pair.
parameter set pair
Unified all the pa- Make the same calibration settings for all param- Initial value
rameter set eter sets.
Preset/Offset Separated for each Set the preset and offset for each parameter set. Initial value
parameter set
Unified all the pa- Set the same presets and offsets for all parame-
rameter set ter sets.

Tips
Cannot be set to a combination of [Separated for each parameter set pair.] for [Calibration] and [Unified all the
parameter set.] for [Preset/Offset].

C-49 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.4 [Edit parameter set] Screen


Edit the parameter set to be used for the measurement.
The measurement conditions of the parameter set change according to contents of the common set-
tings.

Tips
• Parameters are set to default values at the factory. For details on initial values, see "■ [Measurement
condition 1] screen" on page C-14.
• A total of 20 parameter sets can be registered.

① ② ③ ④

No. Description
① Displays the settings for [Common setting 1], [Common setting 2] and [Common setting
3].
② Returns to the [Common setting 3] screen.
③ Continues to the [Check settings] screen.
④ If the common settings are changed, the associated settings for each parameter set are
adjusted automatically.
Adjusted parameter sets are indicated by a * mark.
Check the contents of the adjusted parameter set and click this button to clear the * mark.

C-50 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

Tips
If [Two items measurement] is set, two parameter sets are selected.
The paired parameter set combinations are as follows.
– 0 and 5
– 1 and 6
– 2 and 7
– 3 and 8
– 4 and 9
– 10 and 15
– 11 and 16
– 12 and 17
– 13 and 18
– 14 and 19

1 Click to the right of the parameter set number.


» The [Parameter setting] screen is displayed.

② ③ ④

No. Description
① Edits the parameter set label. Labels can include up to 13 half-width alphanumeric char-
acters (uppercase only) and underscore characters.
② Closes the [Parameter setting] screen and returns to the [Edit parameter set] screen.
③ Displays the [Measurement condition 1] screen.
④ Copies the contents of the displayed parameter set to any parameter set.

C-51 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

2 Click [Edit].
» The [Edit parameter set] screen (Measurement condition 1) is displayed.

Tips
• For details on the [Measurement condition 1] screen, see "3.3.5 [Measurement condition 1] Screen" on
page C-54.
• To stop editing the parameter set, click [Close]. The display returns to the [Edit parameter set] screen.

■ Duplicating parameter sets


Parameter sets can be duplicated and registered as new parameter sets.

1 In the [Edit parameter set] screen, click to the right of the parameter set number you want
to duplicate.
» The [Parameter setting] screen is displayed.

2 Click [Copy].

» The [Copy parameter set] screen is displayed.

Tips
Click [Cancel] if you want to stop parameter set duplication. The display returns to the [Parameter setting] screen.

3 Select the parameter set number to be duplicated from the [Select a copy destination] drop-
down list.

C-52 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

4 Click [OK].
» Parameters are replicated to the selected destination parameter set.

C-53 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.5 [Measurement condition 1] Screen


Sets measurement items (such as outer diameter and runout), segment/edge specification, number of
sample measurement and calculation method.
The measurement conditions of the parameter set change according to contents of the common set-
tings.
For details on items displayed, see "■ [Measurement condition 1] screen" on page C-14.

Tips
When two items measurement is enabled, changing the setting of one of the paired parameter sets will also
change the setting of the other parameter set accordingly. The paired parameter set combinations are as
follows.
– 0 and 5
– 1 and 6
– 2 and 7
– 3 and 8
– 4 and 9
– 10 and 15
– 11 and 16
– 12 and 17
– 13 and 18
– 14 and 19

● Pattern 1
When [Segment mode] is selected for the de- When [Transparent mode] is enabled on the
tection method on the [Common setting 1] [Common setting 1] screen.
screen.

"■ Segment mode"


"■ Sample measurement"

② ③

No. Description
① Displays the parameter set number and label.
② Returns to the [Parameter setting] screen.
③ Continues to the [Measurement condition 2] screen.

C-54 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

● Pattern 2
When [Edge Mode] is selected for the detection method on the [Common setting 1] screen.

"■ Edge mode"

C-55 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Segment mode
Segment numbers can be specified when [Segment mode] is selected for the detection method in the
[Common setting 1] screen and the "Other" icon is selected in the [Measurement condition 1] screen.
Specify the segment number according to intended purpose.
For more information on segment mode, see "■ Detection method" on page C-28.

Item Description Remarks


Segment number Click segments to specify them for measurement. Seg- Initial value: 2
ments 1 through 7 can be specified (up to 3 when [Trans-
parent mode] is enabled).
Multiple segments can also be specified.

Tips
• If you want to cancel a selection, click a selected item again.
• If multiple segments are specified, the total measured values
for all specified segments will be displayed.
For example, if segments 1 and 2 are specified, the sum of
measured values for segment 1 and segment 2 will be dis-
played.

■ Edge mode
Edge numbers can be specified when [Edge Mode] is selected for the detection method in the [Common
setting 1] screen.
Specify the segment number according to the intended purpose.
For more information on edge mode, see "■ Detection method" on page C-28.

Item Description Remarks


Start edge num- Enter the edge number to begin measurement from. You can specify con-
ber Enter a number that is smaller than the end edge's. tiguous or non-con-
tiguous numbers as
the start and end
End edge num- Enter the edge number to end measurement with. edge numbers, but
ber Enter a number that is larger than the start edge's. you cannot specify
the same number.

C-56 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Sample measurement
Sets the [No of sample measurement] and [Method] (calculation item).

Measurement example
"6.2.9 Two Items Measurement of Outer Diameter and Run-Out of Rubber Roll (Sample Measure-
ment)" on page C-142

Item Description Remarks


No of sample Enter the number of sample measurement (0–999). Initial value: 1
measurement
Method This can be selected when the [No of sample measure- Initial value: Average
ment] setting is 0 or from 2 through 999. If 1 is set, no
selection is possible.
Select one of the following calculation items from the drop-
down list.
y Average
y Maximum
y Minimum
y Range

Buttons available for measurement and their actions differ depending on the [No of sample measure-
ment] setting.

Tips
When [Two items measurement] is enabled, [Number of averaging] and [No of sample measurement] of paired
parameter sets are automatically set to the same values.

No of sample
measurement [Single run measurement] button ( ) [Continuous] button ( )
0 Not available
Measurement continues until is
clicked.
Measurement values obtained between
the start and end of the measurement
are calculated using the calculation
item set in [Method] and displayed as a
single measurement value.
1 One measurement is taken and the Single run measurement is repeated
measured value is displayed. until you click the button, and the
measured value is displayed for each
measurement.
2–999 The number of measurements set in
Measurement is repeated until is
[No of sample measurement] is per-
clicked.
formed.
Each set of measurements shown at
Measurement values obtained between
left is calculated using the calculation
the start and end of the measurement
item set in [Method] and displayed as a
are calculated using the calculation
single measurement value.
item set in [Method] and displayed as a
single measurement value.

C-57 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

Tips
• The larger the number of sample measurement, the longer each measurement takes and the longer the
refresh interval of the measurement screen becomes. This should not be mistaken for frozen operation.
• For details on single run measurement, see "5.3.1 Single Run Measurement" on page C-105.
• For details on continuous run measurement, see "5.3.2 Continuous Run Measurement" on page C-107.

C-58 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.6 [Measurement condition 2] Screen


Sets the details of measurement conditions.
The measurement conditions of the parameter set change according to contents of the common set-
tings.

"■ Number of averaging (mea-


surement interval)"

"■ Outlier elimination"

"■ GO/NG judgment"

"■ Analog output"

"■ Auto-work detection (set


individually)"

① ② ③

No. Description
① Displays the parameter set name and [Measurement condition 1] settings.
② Returns to the [Measurement condition 1] screen.
③ Continues to the [Check settings] screen.

C-59 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Number of averaging (measurement interval)


Sets the number of averaging (measurement interval) for the averaging method set in the [Common
setting 1] screen.
By specifying the number of averaging and the averaging method for the measured values, you can
configure the measurement interval.
Setting a larger value for the number of averaging improves repeatability and stabilizes the measured
value. If measurement time permits, specify as large a value as possible for the number of averaging.

Item Description Remarks


Number of aver- Select from the drop-down list.
aging
Number of averaging for [Arithmetical average]: 1–2048*. Initial value: 1024
*When ultra-fine wire measurement is specified: 16–
2048
Number of averaging for [Moving average]: 32–2048 Initial value: 1024

IMPORTANT
• The [Number of averaging] should be set to 16 or more.
• When the [Number of averaging] is set to 8 or less, an output buffer overflow may occur depending on the
specifications of your PC and usage conditions*. For details on output buffer overflow errors, see "1 Error
Messages and Solutions" on page F-1 in "PART F Troubleshooting".
*C
 onditions such as the number of LSMs connected, calculation registration settings, communication status,
and whether other applications are in use.
• Some [Number of averaging] settings require a high-speed communication environment. Use of a PC with
higher specifications or an IF module and PLC may be required.

Tips
When [Two items measurement] is enabled, the [Number of averaging] of the paired parameter sets is automat-
ically set to the same value. For details, see "■ Scans for averaging (method setting)" on page C-35.

● Relationship between the number of averaging and measurement interval (measure-


ment time)

With [Arithmetical average]

Measurement interval for


Number of averaging [Arithmetical average]
(seconds)
1 0.0003125
2 0.000625
4 0.00125
8 0.0025
16 0.005
32 0.01
64 0.02
128 0.04
256 0.08
512 0.16
1024 0.32
2048 0.64

C-60 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

Tips
The above measurement intervals apply when the number of sample measurement is 1.
If the number of sample measurement is n, the actual measurement interval is the number indicated above
multiplied by n.
For details, see "■ Sample measurement" on page C-57.

With [Moving average]

Measurement interval (seconds) with [Moving


Number of averaging average]
1st data 2nd data on
1 — —
2 — —
4 — —
8 — —
16 — —
32 0.01 0.005
64 0.02 0.005
128 0.04 0.005
256 0.08 0.005
512 0.16 0.005
1024 0.32 0.005
2048 0.64 0.005

Tips
The above measurement intervals apply when the number of sample measurement is 1.
If the number of sample measurement is n, measurement intervals will be as follows.
1st data: time for the set number of averaging + 0.005 × (n-1)
2nd data on: 0.005 x n
For details on number of sample measurement, see "■ Sample measurement" on page C-57.

C-61 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Outlier elimination
When [Outlier Elimination] is enabled in the [Common setting 1] screen, set the upper and lower limits of
normal values in the [Measurement condition 2] screen.
Once upper and lower limits have been set, the measured value is determined for each measurement
interval as follows.

Item Description
Upper lim. Enter the upper limit of normal values. If a measured value is greater than the
upper limit, it is excluded as an abnormal value.
Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maximum of seven digits.
Lower lim. Enter the lower limit of normal values. If the measured value is less than the low-
er limit, it is excluded as an abnormal value.
Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maximum of seven digits.
Count val. When the number of abnormal values reaches the number set, an outlier detec-
tion warning is displayed.
Tips
The number of measurements that are counted depends on settings made in the com-
mon settings. For details, see "■ Outlier elimination (count target setting)" on page
C-39.
For details on the outlier detection warning, see "1 Error Messages and Solutions"
on page F-1 in "PART F Troubleshooting".

IMPORTANT
This function is disabled if both [Upper lim.] and [Lower lim.] are left blank.

C-62 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ GO/NG judgment
Enter the tolerances for the judgment method set in the [Common setting 1] screen in the [Measurement
condition 2] screen.
The relationship between the judgment method and tolerances is shown below.
Judgement
Setting item Description
method
Upper/Lower limit Upper lim. Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maximum
of seven digits.
Lower lim. Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maximum
of seven digits.
Multi-limits Ranges: 3 to 6 Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maximum
L1 to L6 of seven digits.
Target value and Target value Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maximum
tolerance of seven digits.
Upper tol. Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maximum
of seven digits.
Lower tol. Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maximum
of seven digits.

IMPORTANT
• If all input fields are blank, this function is disabled.
• An error dialog box is displayed if any of the entries are incomplete.

For details on the GO/NG judgment method, see "■ GO/NG judgment method" on page C-40.

C-63 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Analog output
You can observe the difference between the measured value and the reference value using analog
output.
Specify the reference value and the scale value (gain).

Item Description Remarks


Reference value Enter the reference value. Initial value: blank
You can enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a
maximum of seven digits.
Scale Select the multiplier for displaying analog output values Initial value: 1
from the drop-down list. See the table below for multipliers
and gain when each option (1 to 5) is selected.

Analog voltage values are output according to the following formula.


Analog output voltage = (measured value - analog output reference value) x gain
See the following table for analog voltage outputs.

Gain Display range


[Scale] setting value
(output voltage/displayed (maximum output voltage/max-
(multiplier)
value) imum displayed value)
1 (1 times) 0.625 mV/0.01 μm ±5 V/±80 μm
2 (10 times) 0.625 mV/0.1 μm ±5 V/±800 μm
3 (100 times) 0.625 mV/1 μm ±5 V/±8 mm
4 (1000 times) 0.625 mV/10 μm ±5 V/±80 mm
5 (10000 times) 0.625 mV/100 μm ±5 V/±800 mm

C-64 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Auto-work detection (set individually)


When [Auto-work detection] is enabled in the [Common setting 1] screen, set the number of measure-
ments, invalid time, and upper and lower limits in the [Measurement condition 2] screen.
Enter setting values according to your purpose.
For details on the detection method and scanning rate for [Auto-work detection], see "■ [Auto-work
detection] (method and scanning rate settings)" on page C-32.

Item Description Setting value Remarks


No. of Meas. Enter the number of measurements. 0–999 Initial value: 0
Invalid time (ms) Enter the length of time from when a work- 0–9999 Initial value: 0
piece is detected to the start of measure-
ment (invalid time).
Invalid time is the length of time where
locations not included in the scan, such as
the chamfered portion, are scanned.
Upper lim. Specify the detection upper limit. N/A Initial value: 0
Enter a number with the sign (plus or mi-
nus) and a maximum of seven digits.
Lower lim. Specify the detection lower limit. N/A Initial value: 0
Enter a number with the sign (plus or mi-
nus) and a maximum of seven digits.

IMPORTANT
• If all input fields are blank, this function is disabled.
• An error dialog box is displayed if any of the entries are incomplete.

C-65 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.7 [Check settings] Screen


Confirms your settings in the [Check settings] screen and saves the measurement settings for the pa-
rameter set.

① ②

No. Description
① Returns to the [Measurement condition 2] screen.
② Completes the settings and returns to the [Edit parameter set] screen.

1 Check the settings and if there are no problems, click [Complete].


» The [Edit parameter set] screen is displayed.

Tips
To edit the settings, click [Previous].

2 Click [Next] on the [Edit parameter set] screen.


» The [Check settings] screen for editing measurement settings is displayed.

3 Click [Complete] on the [Check settings] screen of measurement settings editing.


» The [Check settings] message screen is displayed.

Tips
In this screen, you can check the contents of common settings and parameter sets and select a parameter set.
For details on selecting parameter sets, see "3.3.8 Selecting Parameter Sets" on page C-68.

C-66 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

4 Confirm the parameter set No. on the [Check settings] message screen, and if there are no
problems, click [Yes].
» The [Measurement settings have been saved] message screen is displayed.

Tips
If you want to change the parameter set No., click [No].

5 Click [OK].
» The [Setting information] tab of the advanced setting screen is displayed.

C-67 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.8 Selecting Parameter Sets


You can select the parameter set to be used on the [Check settings] screen of measurement settings
editing and on the [Setting information] tab of the detail screen.
Click [▼] or [▲] to switch parameter sets.

C-68 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.9 Saving and Loading Settings Files

■ Saving settings files

Click [Save setting file], specify the location where the file is to be saved, then name the file and save it.
Only controller-specific information can be saved.
Specifically, this includes the following.
y All common settings
y All parameter sets

Tips
The [Unit], [Memorize light amount], [Calibration], [Preset], and [Offset] are stored in the controller itself.

IMPORTANT
Environmental setting are not saved in a system settings file.

C-69 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Loading settings files

Click [Open setting file], specify the file, and click [Open].
The settings file is reflected in LSMPAK.

C-70 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.3.10 Initialization of Settings


This section describes the procedure for initializing settings (common settings, parameter sets, etc.).
Initialization returns the following items to their default values (factory settings).
y Common settings
y Parameter set
y Memorize light amount
y Calibration
y Preset, Offset
It is recommended that you save any needed settings before initialization.
For information about how to save settings files, see "3.3.9 Saving and Loading Settings Files" on
page C-69.

1 Click the [Setting information] tab on the LSMPAK detail screen.

2 Click [Initialization].

» The [Initialization] screen is displayed.

C-71 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3 Click [Yes].

» The controller is restarted and each item is returned to its default value (factory setting).

Tips
Initializing and restarting the controller takes several minutes.
Please wait without exiting LSMPAK.

C-72 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.4 Memorize Light Amount


After completing measurement settings, set the sensor's light amount memorize mode.
Ordinarily, set the light amount memorize mode to [Automatic adjustment].
If the light amount of the transiting laser beam is low during measurement (e.g., during measurement of
narrow gaps), set the light amount memorize mode to [Use the previous value (Previous value update)].
See below for details on the setting procedure.
y "3.4.1 Automatic Adjustment Mode" on page C-73
y "3.4.2 [Use the previous value (Previous value update)] Mode" on page C-74

3.4.1 Automatic Adjustment Mode

1 Click the [Memorize light amount] tab on the LSMPAK detail screen.

No. Description
① Returns to the home screen.
② Displays the current settings.

2 Click [Automatic adjustment].


» A message screen is displayed and the light amount memorize mode is set to [Automatic adjustment].

3 Click [OK] on the message screen.


» The display returns to the detail screen.

C-73 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.4.2 [Use the previous value (Previous value update)] Mode


If the light amount of the transiting laser beam is low during measurement (e.g., during measurement of
narrow gaps), set the light amount memorize mode to [Use the previous value (Previous value update)]
and memorize the amount of light.
For more information on measuring narrow gaps, see "6.2.12 Measurement of Narrow Gaps" on
page C-149.

IMPORTANT
To prevent sensor degradation over time from affecting light intensity, you should memorize light intensity two
or three times a year.
If measured values fluctuate greatly due to temperature changes, memorize the light intensity as needed.

1 Remove obstacles that block the laser beam.

IMPORTANT
Before memorizing the light intensity, remove obstacles that block the laser beam, such as the workpiece or
workpiece support jig.

2 Click the [Memorize light amount] tab on the LSMPAK detail screen.

No. Description
① Returns to the home screen.
② Displays the current settings.

C-74 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3 Click [Use the previous value (Previous value update)].


» The [Run the amount of light measurement] screen is displayed.

4 Click [Run].
» On the [Completed] screen, [Succeeded] is displayed (if light amount is successfully memorized).

Tips
If light intensity is insufficient, [Failed] is displayed.
When this message is displayed, click [Retry] and perform steps 2 through 4 again.
To interrupt the light amount memorize mode setting, click [Cancel].

5 Click [Close].
» Light intensity is memorized.
» The display returns to the detail screen.

C-75 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.5 Calculation

3.5.1 Register Calculation


Calculation items (calculation method, target workpiece, and GO/NG judgment conditions) can be set to
calculate measurement values for measurements using multiple sensors.
Since up to eight sets of LSMs can be connected to LSMPAK, the average or standard deviation of up
to 16 measured values can be calculated when performing two items measurement.

IMPORTANT
• Calculation is a limited feature when using LSMPAK. It is not available for other tools (customer-provided
monitor cables, I/O equipment, PLCs, etc.).
• Only one type of operation can be selected.
• When performing arithmetic operations, be sure to use the same sensor model.
• To register as a target calculation, set a label for each LSM in advance.
• Each LSM should be assigned a different label, regardless of whether it is involved in calculations. If multiple
LSMs have the same label assigned, they may not be properly registered for calculation.
For details on how to set labels, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.
• Calculation is performed based on the label information of the calculation target. If, for example, the regis-
tered calculation conditions and the controller label differ due to replacement of the controller or a change
to the calculation target label name after the calculation is registered, the calculation cannot be performed.
If the controller has been replaced or the calculation target label has been changed, please re-register the
calculation.
• The number of averaging and number of sample measurement for each LSM which is a calculation target
should all be aligned to the same setting.
• Operations involving measurements with zero samples cannot be performed. For details on the number of
sample measurement, see "■ Sample measurement" on page C-57.

1 Click [Register calculation] on the home screen.

» The [Register calculation] dialog is displayed.

C-76 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

C-77 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

2 Click [New registration].

» [Select calculation method] screen for calculation registration is displayed.

① ② ③

④ ⑤ ⑥

⑧ ⑨

No. Description Calculation formula


① Sums up the measurements of multiple LSMs. X1+X2+…
② Calculates the average of multiple LSM measurements. Avg(X1,X2,…)
③ Calculates the standard deviation of multiple LSM measure- SD(X1,X2,…)
ments.
④ Calculates the difference between the measurements of two X-Y
LSMs.
⑤ Calculates the upper and lower limit ranges of measured val- Rng(X1,X2,…)
ues for multiple LSMs.
⑥ Calculates film thickness from the measurements of two (X-Y)/2
LSMs.
⑦ Edits the operation label for calculation.
⑧ Cancels the calculation settings and returns to the Home screen.
⑨ Continues to the target measurement selection screen.

Tips
• When [Two items measurement] is enabled, up to two items per LSM can be selected for calculation. When
[Two items measurement] is disabled, only one item per LSM can be selected for calculation.
• [Standard deviation] regards arguments as samples and returns an estimate of the standard deviation of the
population based on the samples.

C-78 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3 Select the desired calculation method and click [Next].


» The [Select target calculation] screen is displayed.
When sum, average, standard deviation, or
When difference is selected
range is selected

When film thickness is selected

4 Select two or more measurement information items to be used in the calculation.

5 Click [Next].
» The [Advanced setting] screen is displayed.

C-79 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

6 Set the GO/NG judgment conditions.

For details, see "■ GO/NG judgment method" on page C-40 and "■ GO/NG judgment" on page C-63.

7 Click [Next].
» The [Check settings] screen is displayed.

Tips
Click [Previous] to modify the calculation settings.

8 Confirm the settings and click [Complete].


» The following message screen is displayed.

9 Click [OK].
» The LSM for which arithmetic operations have been set appears at the top of the measurement list.

C-80 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.5.2 Editing Calculation Settings


To edit a registered calculation, click [Edit calculation setting] on the detail screen. The [Select calcula-
tion method] screen is displayed.

C-81 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.5.3 Clear Calculation


To clear arithmetic operation settings, click [Clear calculation] in the upper left corner of the home
screen.

C-82 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

3.5.4 Save and Load Calculation Setting Files

■ Save calculation setting files

Click [Save calculation file], specify the location where the file is to be saved, then name the file and
save it.
Only controller-specific information can be saved.
Specifically, this includes the following.
y All arithmetic operation settings
y Calibration
y Preset/Offset

IMPORTANT
Environmental setting are not saved in a system settings file.

C-83 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 3 Settings Settings
tion ment

■ Load calculation settings files

Click [Open calculation file], specify the file, and click [Open].
The settings file is reflected in LSMPAK.

IMPORTANT
Loading of the calculation file is performed based on the label information of the calculation target. If, for exam-
ple, the controller has been replaced and the saved calculation conditions and controller labels are different,
the calculation file cannot be read. For details on setting labels, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page
C-24.

C-84 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

4 Calibration
After completing the settings, perform calibration of the LSM (sensor) before measuring.
Sometimes a measurement error occurs due to the influence of the shape/material/surface state of a
workpiece, installation situations, etc. To reduce such errors and perform measurements with higher
accuracy, be sure to calibrate before measuring.

About calibration gages


Calibration requires a calibration gage or workpiece.
You can use calibration gages made by Mitutoyo.

IMPORTANT
• The type of calibration gage to use will differ according to sensor model.
For details about calibration gages, see "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor> User's Manual" (separate
document).
• If the customer prepares gages or workpieces for calibration, the dimensional ratio of the gages used for
calibration (large to small) should be 1.2 times or greater. Calibration using gages or workpieces with similar
diameters may not provide sufficient measurement accuracy.
• Executing calibration clears the preset and offset settings.
• Selecting a calibration gage or workpiece that is made of the same or similar material as that measured
workpieces enables measurements with higher accuracy. If a gage of different material is used, an error may
occur due to the difference in surface roughness or material.

④ ⑤ ⑥

No. Description
① Cancels calibration setting and returns to the home screen.
② Select the parameter set to be used. (Appears only when two items measurement is enabled.)
③ Displays currently set calibration values.
④ Cancels calibration.
⑤ Performs 1 point calibration (HIGH CAL).
⑥ Performs 2 points calibration (HIGH CAL and LOW CAL).

C-85 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

Tips
1 point calibration should be used if, for example, there is only one type of workpiece to be measured.
Use 2 points calibration when there are many types of workpieces to be measured and you want to ensure
linearity over a wide area.

C-86 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

4.1 Standard Calibration


Make sure that measurement settings are complete before proceeding to calibration.

IMPORTANT
• Execute calibration after the measurement settings are configured.
• After executing calibration, the preset and offset are cleared. Set the preset and offset values after complet-
ing calibration.

For outer diameter measurements, check that the following settings are made.

Segment mode Edge mode


Segment 2 (optional) Manual measurement or automatic measurement
(diameter)
Start edge 2
End edge 3

Tips
• For details on segment and edge mode, see "3.3.5 [Measurement condition 1] Screen" on page C-54.
• There is no restriction on segment mode for calibration. If a gap or displacement needs to be precisely mea-
sured, a thickness gage can be used for calibration. However, when measuring an outer diameter or a gap,
there may be a slight difference.

1 Let the LSM run for 30 minutes to 1 hour (warm-up operation).

Tips
If warm-up operation has been completed, proceed to step 2 .

2 Clean calibration gages and workpieces with alcohol or thinner to remove any deposits of oil
or dust.

IMPORTANT
The calibration gage or workpiece is critical to the measurement accuracy of the LSM. After use, apply rust
prevention oil to prevent rusting during storage.

3 Set the calibration gage or workpiece.

Tips
• It is convenient to adjust positioning of the gage or workpiece while checking the workpiece position display
on the LSMPAK.
For information about how to read the workpiece position display and how to adjust the measured workpiece
position, see "5.1 Setting the Workpiece" on page C-95.
• For 2 points calibration, execute calibration in the order of HIGH CAL gage (large diameter) → LOW CAL
gage (small diameter).

C-87 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

4 Click [1 point calibration] or [2 points calibration].


» The [Set calibration value] screen is displayed.

① ①

② ③ ② ③

No. Description
① Displays the edit calibration value screen.
② Returns display to the detail screen.
③ Continues to the [Run HIGH CAL] screen.

5 Check the calibration value.

Tips
If you don't need to change the calibration value, proceed to step 7 .

6 Edit calibration values.


1 Click on the right side of the calibration value.
» The [Edit] screen is displayed.
2 Enter new calibration values.

Tips
To stop editing calibration values, click [Cancel].

3 Click [OK].
» The display returns to the [Calibration value] screen.

Tips
For 2 points calibration, edit the LOW CAL calibration value using in the same procedure as when editing
the HIGH CAL calibration value.

7 Click [Next].
» The [Run HIGH CAL] screen is displayed.

C-88 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

8 Set the HIGH CAL gage (large diameter).

Stepped type Laser beam


Set the gage on the gage stand so that

Verified dimension
the "|" mark is vertical. Reception
unit

Laser scanning position


Emission unit
With-holder type Verified dimension Laser beam
Set the gage on the gage stand so that
the laser beam hits the "|" mark. Reception
unit
Laser scanning
position

Emission
unit

9 Click [Run] on the [Run HIGH CAL] screen (to perform HIGH CAL calibration).

» HIGH CAL calibration is performed.


» The [Run LOW CAL] screen is displayed.

Tips
• In the case of 1 point calibration, the calibration completion message screen is displayed.
Click [OK] on the message screen to return to the detail screen.
• To repeat measurement, click [Run again].

C-89 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

10 Set the LOW CAL gage (small diameter).


• As with the HIGH CAL gage, set the gage Laser beam
stand so that the center of the verified
range is measured. Reception
• A LOW CAL gage smaller than 2 mm unit
should be set in the mounting hole of the
gage stand.

Emission
unit

11 Click [Run] on the [Run LOW CAL] screen (to perform LOW CAL calibration).

» LOW CAL calibration is performed.


» The calibration completion message screen is displayed.

12 Click [OK] on the message screen.


» Calibration is set.
» Calibration values in the [Calibration] tab of the detail screen are updated.
» in the measurement information changes to .

C-90 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

■ Canceling calibration
The currently set calibration is canceled by the following procedure.

1 Click the [Calibration] tab on the detail screen.

2 Click [Disable calibration].

» The following message screen is displayed.

Tips
Click [No] if you decide not to cancel calibration.
The display returns to the detail screen.

3 Click [Yes].
» The following message screen is displayed.

4 Click [OK].
» The display returns to the detail screen.

C-91 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

4.2 Operational Calibration


After registering arithmetic operations, it is recommended that operational calibration be performed
before starting sum or other arithmetic operations.
For details, see "6.1.5 Measurement (arithmetic calculation) with Multiple Combined LSMs" on page
C-120.
In particular, when measuring a large-diameter workpiece with two sensors stacked above and below
each other as shown in the figure below, execute individual calibration and operational calibration for the
effect of reflected light.
For information on the effect of reflected light, see "■ The effect of reflected light" on page C-94.
In the figure below, sensor 1 and sensor 2 are combined to measure a workpiece. Reference bars (edg-
es) are placed above and below the workpiece to improve measurement reproducibility.

Reference bar

1
Sensor 2
Workpiece

1
Sensor 1

Reference bar

C-92 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

③ ④ ⑤

No. Description
① Cancels calibration setting and returns to the home screen.
② Displays currently set calibration values.
③ Cancels calibration.
④ Performs 1 point calibration (HIGH CAL).
⑤ Performs 2 points calibration (HIGH CAL and LOW CAL).

The calibration procedure is the same as for the LSM by itself.


For details, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

IMPORTANT
• When measuring a large-diameter workpiece with two sensors stacked vertically, be sure to perform "2
points calibration" when performing calculation calibration. Calibration cannot be performed properly with "1
point calibration".
• Operational calibration using measurements with zero samples is not possible. For details on the number of
sample measurement, see "■ Sample measurement" on page C-57.

C-93 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 4 Calibration Settings
tion ment

■ The effect of reflected light


When measuring a large-diameter workpiece with two sensors stacked vertically, light reflected by the
large-diameter workpiece affects the measurement.
Reflected light reduces measurement accuracy compared to individual sensor measurements.
The degree to which reflected light influences measurement (e1 and e2 in the figure below) is not only
proportional to the diameter of the workpiece to be measured, but also depends on the reflectivity of its
surface.
Therefore, when measuring a large-diameter workpiece with two sensors stacked vertically, it is recom-
mended that operational calibration be performed in addition to normal calibration.

Reception lens

e1 θ

Workpiece Light-receiving element

Workpieces with small diameters

Reception lens

e2 θ

Light-receiving element

Workpiece

Workpieces with large diameters

C-94 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

5 Measurements

5.1 Setting the Workpiece


After calibration is complete, set the workpiece on the sensor.
Adjust the position of the workpiece to be measured while watching the workpiece position display on
LSMPAK.
For details on the workpiece position display, see "● [Work position (parallel)]" on page A-25 "PART
A Overview".

■ Adjust workpiece positioning

1 Click [Reset].
» [Focus Condition] (the degree of focus) is reset.

2 Set the workpiece between the sensor's emission unit and reception unit.

Workpiece

Jig

C-95 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

3 Adjust horizontal positioning of the workpiece.


1 Move the workpiece parallel to the optical axis while checking the laser spot and focus condition graph in
the [Work position (parallel)] area.
2 Set the workpiece for optimum focus.

4 Adjust positioning of the workpiece in the scanning direction.


1 Move the workpiece in the scanning direction (longitudinal direction of the light-emitting window) while
checking the gage in the [Work position (up and down)] area and the shadowed area indicating the work-
piece to be measured.
2 Set the workpiece to align the center of the shadowed area with the Center (50) position of the gage.

Tips
When measuring a gap, set the workpiece so that the center of the measurement area is aligned with
Center (50).

IMPORTANT
• Although measurements are possible outside the measurement area as long as they are within the
laser scanning range, they will not fulfill the accuracy specifications of the LSM measurement unit.
• In particular, note that the LSM-02-A has a narrow measurement area.
• If a thin workpiece is placed outside the measurement area, "Err-0" (no workpiece error) may appear on
the data display. In such cases, adjust the position of the workpiece so that values are displayed.

C-96 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

5.2 Setting the Preset and Offset


Set the preset and offset values after completing calibration.
Settings can be made or canceled from the [Preset/Offset] tab of the detail screen.
For arithmetic operations, use the [Preset/Offset] tab on the detail screen of the operation to set or can-
cel the setting.
The procedure for setting up and canceling is the same.

5.2.1 Preset
By using the preset function, you can display the dimensional difference between the workpiece and the
reference gage/master gage or measure a workpiece that is larger than the measuring range.

Preset
The setting of the dimensional value of a reference gage or master gage is called a preset.
This is applied to measurement of the absolute dimensions of the workpiece to be measured.
The preset value can also be set to zero to measure the difference (deviation) from a reference or mas-
ter gage.

IMPORTANT
Presets that include measurements with zero samples cannot be made. For details on the number of sample
measurement, see "■ Sample measurement" on page C-57.

Tips
Setting a preset value resets the offset information.

C-97 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

Direction
When setting the preset, specify the direction in which measured values increase and decrease.
Depending on the type of a workpiece, decide whether it will be the positive direction or the negative
direction.

Positive direction is specified Negative direction is specified


Measurement example Measurement example
The shaded portion D of the workpiece is being The light portion W (gap) of the workpiece is
measured. being measured to determine the dimension L of
Measurement example: "6.2.5 High-Precision the workpiece.
Outer Diameter Measurement of Round Bar (Pre- Measurement example: "6.2.6 Plate-Shaped
set Function)" on page C-134 Width Measurement (Preset Function)" on page
C-136
Reference bar

Direction of
Direction of
W
D laser scanning
laser scanning

L
Workpiece
Workpiece

Reference surface

C-98 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

■ Setting preset
Specify [Preset value] and [Direction].

Item Description Remarks


Preset value Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maxi- Initial value: 0
mum of seven digits.
Direction Specify the direction in which measured values increase or Initial value:
decrease. positive direction
y Positive direction
y Negative direction

1 Set the reference gage/master gage.

2 Measure the reference gage/master gage.

3 Specify the preset value and the direction.


1 Click the [Preset/Offset] tab on the detail screen.
» The currently set preset value and direction are displayed.

2 Click [Preset settings].


» The [Preset] screen is displayed.

Tips
If you do not want to change the preset value or direction, click [Cancel]. The display returns to the detail
screen.

3 Enter the preset value in the preset value field.


4 Select the Direction.

C-99 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

5 Click [Run].
» A message screen is displayed.

» The preset value and direction are set.


6 Click [OK].
» The display returns to the detail screen.

C-100 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

■ Canceling the preset


The currently set preset is canceled by the following procedure.

1 Click the [Preset/Offset] tab on the detail screen.

2 Click [Cancel Preset].

» A message screen is displayed.

Tips
Click [No] if you decide not to cancel the preset.
The display returns to the detail screen.

3 Click [Yes].
» Preset is canceled.
» A message screen is displayed.

4 Click [OK].
» The display returns to the detail screen.

C-101 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

5.2.2 Offset
If you configure the offset, the total correction value becomes "Preset value" + "±Offset value". Setting a
positive (+) or negative (-) offset value makes the measured value larger or smaller, respectively.

Tips
• When configuring the offset, you do not need a reference gage or master gage. (This is because reference
gages and master gages are not measured.)
• If preset or zero-set is configured again, the offset is canceled.
• If you configure the offset without setting a preset value, the total correction value becomes "Measured value
(displayed value)" + "±Offset value".

■ Setting the offset


Specify the offset value.

Item Description Remarks


Offset value Enter a number with the sign (plus or minus) and a maxi- Initial value: No off-
mum of seven digits. set is specified

1 Click the [Preset/Offset] tab on the detail screen.


» The currently set offset value is displayed.

2 Click [Offset settings].


» The [Offset] screen is displayed.

Tips
If you do not want to change the offset value, click [Cancel]. The display returns to the detail screen.

C-102 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

3 Enter the offset value in the offset value field.

4 Click [Run].
» The offset value is set.
» A message screen is displayed.

5 Click [OK].
» The display returns to the detail screen.

C-103 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

■ Canceling the offset


The currently set offset is canceled by the following procedure.

1 Click the [Preset/Offset] tab on the detail screen.

2 Click [Offset remove].

» A message screen is displayed.

Tips
Click [No] if you decide not to cancel the offset. The display returns to the detail screen.

3 Click [Yes].
» Offset is canceled.
» A message screen is displayed.

4 Click [OK].
» The display returns to the detail screen.

C-104 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

5.3 Measurement Execution Method (Measurement


Mode)
This section describes how measurements are performed (measurement modes) by the LSM.

IMPORTANT
When using LSMPAK to acquire measurements, it cannot be used in conjunction with other tools (such as
customer-provided monitoring tools, I/O devices, and PLCs). Please keep this in mind when performing mea-
surements with LSMPAK.

Tips
To perform measurements by means other than LSMPAK, see "1 Interface Overview" on page D-1 in
"PART D Interfaces".

5.3.1 Single Run Measurement

■ When [No of sample measurement] is 1


This is the measurement performed when [No of sample measurement] is set to 1 in the sample mea-
surement settings.
Measurement is performed according to the set contents of the parameter set.
Only one measurement value is output.

Measurement start Click .


Measurement end Automatic termination

Automatic termination

Measured value
(Displayed value)

Varies depending on the


number of averaging.

■ When [No of sample measurement] is from 2 through 999


This is the measurement performed when [No of sample measurement] is set to 2 to 999 in the sample
measurement settings.
Measurement (sampling) is performed for the set number of sample measurement and set calculation
items are executed.
Only one measurement value is output.
For details, see "■ Sample measurement" on page C-57.

Measurement start Click .


Measurement end Automatic termination

C-105 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

When the number of sample measurement is 2


Calculated values
(Displayed value) Automatic termination

Measured value Measured value


(First sampling) (Second sampling)

Varies depending on the number of averaging.

■ When [No of sample measurement] is 0


This is the measurement performed when [No of sample measurement] is set to 0 in the sample mea-
surement settings. This is also referred to as "zero run measurement".
Measurement is performed from the starting measurement operation to the ending measurement opera-
tion and the set calculation items are executed.
Only one measurement value is output.
This is useful when measuring cylindricity or run-out of rotating rolls, or when you want to extend mea-
surement time.
For details, see "■ Sample measurement" on page C-57.

Measurement start Click .


Measurement end Click .

Tips
After 65535 measurements have been performed, measurement is automati-
cally terminated.

Calculated values
(Displayed value)

Measured value Measured value Measured value Measured value


(First sampling) (Second sampling) (First sampling) (Second sampling)

Varies depending on the number of averaging.

C-106 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

5.3.2 Continuous Run Measurement

■ When [No of sample measurement] is 1


This is the measurement performed when [No of sample measurement] is set to 1 in the sample mea-
surement settings.
Measurement is repeated continuously according to the set contents of the parameter set.
Multiple measurement values are output.

Measurement start Click .


Measurement end Click .

Measured value Measured value Measured value Measured value


(Displayed value) (Displayed value) (Displayed value) (Displayed value)

Varies depending on the number of averaging.

■ When [No of sample measurement] is from 2 through 999


This is the measurement performed when [No of sample measurement] is set to 2 to 999 in the sample
measurement settings.
Measurement (sampling) is performed for the set number of sample measurement and set calculation
items are executed.
Multiple measurement values are output.
For details, see "■ Sample measurement" on page C-57.

Measurement start Click .


Measurement end Click .

When number of sample measurement is 2


Calculated values Calculated values
(Displayed value) (Displayed value)

Measured value Measured value Measured value Measured value


(First sampling) (Second sampling) (Third sampling) (Fourth sampling)

Varies depending on the number of averaging.

C-107 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

5.4 Confirming Measurements and Statistics

5.4.1 Confirming Measured Values


Select the [Measurement history] tab on the detail screen to check measured values.

Tips
The number of points that can be measured using LSMPAK is up to 100,000.
Measured values should be saved or cleared periodically, as an error is displayed if the number of points ex-
ceeds 100,000.

① ② ③

⑥ ⑧

No. Description
① Clears the measurement history and statistical values.
② Statistics are displayed in the list at the bottom.
③ Saves measurement data.
④ Parameter set No.
⑤ Measurement No.
⑥ Measured value
⑦ Statistical values
⑧ Measured values are displayed as a line graph. The vertical and horizontal axis scales are
adjustable. However, defaults are restored if you move between tabs or re-measure.

C-108 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

5.4.2 Confirming Statistics


Statistics are displayed for measurement results such as single and continuous measurements.
To check statistics by means other than LSMPAK, see "1 Interface Overview" on page D-1 in
"PART D Interfaces".
The following items are displayed as statistical values.
y Number (N)
y Average (AVG)
y Standard deviation (S.D.)
y Range (R): maximum value - minimum value
y Maximum value (MAX)
y Minimum value (MIN)

■ Displaying statistics

1 Click the [Measurement history] tab on the LSMPAK detail screen.

2 Click [View statistics].


» Statistical values are displayed.

Tips
If [View statistics] does not appear, [Statistical Processing] may be disabled in the parameter settings of the
[Measurement condition 2] screen. When [Enable] is selected, [View statistics] appears on the [Measurement
history] tab.

C-109 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

5.4.3 Storage of Measured Values


Measurement data can be saved.

1 Click [Save measurement data].


» A screen is displayed for selecting a location for data storage.

2 Follow the screen directions to save the measurement data.


» Measurement data is stored.

Tips
Measurement data is saved in CSV format. If GO/NG judgment is set, GO/NG judgment results will be includ-
ed. Saved CSV files can be opened using Excel or other software. For details, see the manual of the software
used.

■ CSV file format


This section describes the CSV file format used by LSMPAK to save measurement data.

● Text
Character types: Half-width alphabetic characters (upper and lowercase), numerals, and half-width
symbols
Encoding: UTF8

● Format
Example
"---","No.7","Judge"
"1","1.12345","-NG"
"2","2.12345","OK"
"3","3.12345","+NG"

y Header row and data rows


The first row is the header row (column heading) and the second and following rows are data rows.

y Field delimiters
Delimiter characters are used to separate fields.

Tips
The symbols used for field delimiters and decimal points follow the settings of the Windows PC on which LSM-
PAK is installed.
• Japanese and English: Commas (,) as delimiters, periods (.) for decimal points
• German: Semicolons (;) as delimiters, commas (,) for decimal points

y Field values
Field values are enclosed in double quotation marks (").

Tips
There are no spaces between delimiters and double quotation marks.

C-110 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

● Composition of measurement data columns for individual LSMs


Example
"---","No.2","Judge","Range","No.7","Judge","Range"
"1","1.12345","-NG","R1","7.12345","+NG","R7"

From left to right: Sequence number, measured value of item A, GO/NG judgment of item A, range of
item A, measured value of item B, GO/NG judgment of item B, range of item B.

Tips
• In the case of one-item measurement, the columns related to item B (measured value, GO/NG, and range)
are omitted.
Example

"---","No.2","Judge","Range"
"1","1.12345","-NG","R1"
• If the GO/NG judgment method is not multi-limit selection, the range column is omitted (the GO/NG column
is not omitted).
Example

"---","No.2","Judge"
"1","1.12345","-NG"

● Column composition of measured data at the time of calculation


Example
"---","Calc","Judge","Range","LSM1[A]","LSM2[B]"
"1","3.24690","+NG","R7","1.12345","2.12345"

From left to right: Sequence number, calculated, GO/NG judgment of calculated value, range of calculat-
ed value, operation target 1, operation target 2, ...... (all subsequent operation targets follow).

Tips
No GO/NG judgment or range is added to the operation target.

● If there is blank data


If no GO/NG judgment threshold is set, the GO/NG column of each data row will contain a half-width
space.
If multi-limit GO/NG judgment without thresholds is selected, the GO/NG and range columns of each
data line will contain half-width spaces.

Example
"---","No.7","Judge","Range"
"1","1.12345"," "," "

● Typical content and formatting of individual columns


Sequence number
Header row "---"
Data row "1", "2", "3", ……, "100000"

C-111 No. 99MBC150A


Calibra- Measure-
PART C : 5 Measurements Settings
tion ment

Measured value
"No.0", "No.1", ……, "No.19"
Header row
Parameter set number.
Numeric value such as 12.12345.
The symbol used for decimal points follow the settings of Windows.
Data row
The number of digits after the decimal point is 5 when the unit is "mm" and 6
when the unit is "in".

Operational target
Operational target name such as "LSM1[B]".
The description format is "(LSM label) [(item)]".
Header row The "item" portion is determined as follows.
y With one-item measurement: A
y Upper item of 2-item measurement: A
y Lower item of 2-item measurement: B
Numeric value such as 12.12345.
The symbol used for decimal points follow the settings of Windows.
Data row
The number of digits after the decimal point is 5 when the unit is "mm" and 6
when the unit is "in".

Calculated values
Header row "Calc"
Numeric value such as 12.12345.
The symbol used for decimal points follow the settings of Windows.
Data row
The number of digits after the decimal point is 5 when the unit is "mm" and 6
when the unit is "in".

GO/NG judgment (upper and lower limits, target value and tolerance)
Header row "Judge"
"-NG", "OK", "+NG", " " (half-width space*)
Data row
* If no upper/lower limits, etc. are set.

GO/NG judgment (multi-limit selection)


Header row "Range"
"R1", "R2", "R3", "R4", "R5", "R6", "R7", " " (half-width space*)
Data row * When the threshold for multi-limit selection is not set and the range is not
defined.

C-112 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6 Measure Procedure

6.1 Basic Measurements


The measuring method varies by measurement position of the workpiece or the measurement item.
This section provides an overview of the basic measurements: outer diameter, gap, run-out, and thick-
ness.

6.1.1 Outer Diameter Measurements


Measure the outer diameter of a wire or round bar with the following procedure.
Depending on the dimensional calculation, ellipticity and simple cylindricity can also be measured.

Workpiece example

Segment 1

② Direction of
Segment 2
laser scanning

Workpiece
Segment 3

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


On the [Measurement condition 1] screen, select [Outer diameter].
The following settings are made automatically.
• Segment: 2
• No of sample measurement: 1
Common settings and parameters other than those listed above should be set according to the intended pur-
pose.

Tips
• Segment mode can also be changed to edge mode in the common settings. If you change to edge mode, set
the edge number in the parameter settings.
• For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

C-113 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

3 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

4 Check the measurement result.

C-114 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.1.2 Gap Measurement


Measure the gap between two rolls with the following procedure.

Workpiece example

Workpiece

Direction of
Segment 1
laser scanning

Gap
Workpiece

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Select [Gap (SEG1)] in [Measurement condition 1] of the parameter settings.
The following settings are made automatically.
• Segment: 1
• No of sample measurement: 1
• Method: Average
Common settings and parameters other than those listed above should be set according to the intended pur-
pose.

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

4 Check the measurement result.

C-115 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.1.3 Run-Out Measurement


The run-out of a rotating workpiece is measured using the reference bar placed above or below the
workpiece to obtain the change in the gap between the reference bar and the workpiece as the run-out.
The measured value is calculated with a calculation of the dimensional difference.
The run-out measurement can also be applied to roundness measurement.

Workpiece example

Rotation
Workpiece

Run-out
through Direction of
Segment 1
rotation laser scanning

Reference bar

Reference bar

1 Configure the settings for measurement for checking the measurement results.
Select [Runout (SEG1)] in [Measurement condition 1] of the parameter settings.
The following settings are made automatically.
• Segment: 1
• No of sample measurement: Other than 1
• Method: Range
To change the number of sample measurement, select [Other] and set [No of sample measurement].
See below for how to calculate the number of sample measurement.
* Example: When the workpiece rotation speed is 3 seconds per rotation, and the measurement interval is
0.08 seconds (number of averaging: 256)
3 seconds ÷ 0.08 seconds = 38
Common settings and parameters other than those listed above should be set according to the intended pur-
pose.

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

C-116 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

3 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

4 Check the measurement result.

C-117 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.1.4 Thickness Measurement


Measure the thickness of a film or sheet with the following procedure.

Workpiece example

Segment 3
Reference bar Reference
bar
Workpiece

Direction of
laser scanning
Roller

Reference bar

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Select [Gap (SEG3)] in the [Measurement condition 1] of the parameter settings.
The following settings are made automatically.
• Segment: 3
• No of sample measurement: 1
• Method: Average
Common settings and parameters other than those listed above should be set according to the intended pur-
pose.

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Preset with no workpiece (reference bar only)


Preset the gap between the reference bar and the roller with no workpiece set.

4 Input the preset and direction values.


Here, enter 0.0 for the preset value and + for the direction value.

C-118 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

Tips
For details on presets, see "5.2.1 Preset" on page C-97.

5 Perform the measurement.


Measure the gap between the reference bar and the roller.
1 Set the workpiece.
2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

6 Check the measurement result.

C-119 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.1.5 Measurement (arithmetic calculation) with Multiple Combined


LSMs
By combining several LSMs, the following measurements can be made.
y Parallel measurement: Simultaneously measure different parts of the workpiece.
y Orthogonal measurement: The outline of the wire is measured simultaneously from the X and Y
directions.
y Large diameter measurement: Measure workpieces with large diameters that cannot be measured
with a single sensor.

IMPORTANT
When performing calculations, be sure to use the same model of sensor. For details on LSM positioning, see
the "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor> User's Manual".

Sensor 1 Sum
Controller 1
Average
Standard deviation
Difference
Range
Controller 2 Film thickness
Sensor 2

■ Parallel measurements
Multiple sensors are placed side by side to measure different parts of the same workpiece.
Registration of arithmetic operations enables calculation of the average, standard deviation, difference,
etc.

Example of sensor arrangement

Sensor 1 Sum
Controller 1
Average
Standard deviation
Difference
Range
Controller 2 Film thickness
Sensor 2

Measurement example: simultaneous


‌ two-position measurement of the outer diameter of a
precision shaft

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Setting item Setting value


Segment mode Sensor 1 Segments 1 to 7
Sensor 2 (segments 1 to 3 for transparent object measurements)

C-120 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

Setting item Setting value


Edge Mode Sensor 1 Edges 1 to 255
Sensor 2

Tips
• For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.
• For details on arithmetic operations, see "3.5.1 Register Calculation" on page C-76.

2 Execute calibration for each LSM.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

4 Check the measurement result.

■ Orthogonal measurement
Two sensors are placed orthogonally to measure the same workpiece.
Registering calculations enables allows calculation of averages, differences, etc.

Example of sensor arrangement

3
3 2 1 2
1

Sensor 1
Controller 1
X direction

Sensor 2
Y direction

Controller 2

C-121 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

Measurement example: ‌simultaneous XY measurement of the outer diameter of a wire

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Setting item Setting value


Segment mode Sensor 1 Outer diameter (segment 2)
Sensor 2
Edge Mode Sensor 1 Start edge: 2
Sensor 2 End edge: 3

Tips
• For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.
• For details on arithmetic operations, see "3.5.1 Register Calculation" on page C-76.

2 Execute calibration for each LSM.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Set the calculation method.


The calculation method can be selected from sum, average, and difference.
For details, see "3.5.1 Register Calculation" on page C-76.

4 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

5 Check the measurement result.

C-122 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

■ Large diameter measurement


Multiple sensors can be placed face to face or in close contact to measure workpieces with large diame-
ters that cannot be measured with a single sensor.
Registration of arithmetic operations enables calculation of the average and standard deviation.

Example of sensors arranged on opposite sides

1 Sensor 1 Controller 1

1 Sensor 2 Controller 2

Example of stacked sensor arrangement

1 Controller 1
Sensor 1

1 Sensor 2
Controller 2

Example of aligning the bottoms of the sensors with each other

1 Controller 1
Sensor 1

Sensor 2
1 Controller 2

C-123 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

Measurement example: Outer


‌ diameter measurement of a large-diameter round bar
            For details on measurement, see "6.2.7 Outer Diameter Measurement of
Large-Diameter Round Bar (Preset Function)" on page C-138.

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Setting item Setting value


Segment mode Sensor 1 Gap (segment 1)
Sensor 2
Edge Mode Sensor 1 Start edge: 1
Sensor 2 End edge: 2

Tips
• For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.
• For details on arithmetic operations, see "3.5.1 Register Calculation" on page C-76.
• When measuring a workpiece with a large diameter, the calculation method must be set to [SUM] in registra-
tion of the arithmetic operation.

2 Perform calibration for each LSM.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Set the calculation method.


Select sum as the calculation method.
For details, see "3.5.1 Register Calculation" on page C-76.

4 Perform operational calibration (2 points calibration)

For details on operational calibration, see "4.2 Operational Calibration" on page C-92.

IMPORTANT
When measuring a large-diameter workpiece with two sensors stacked vertically, be sure to perform "2 points
calibration" when performing calculation calibration. Calibration cannot be performed properly with "1 point
calibration".

5 Perform calculation presets.

For details on calculation presets, "■ Setting preset" on page C-99.

6 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

C-124 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

7 Check the measurement result.

C-125 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2 Advanced Measurement


When measuring a unique workpiece, the settings need to be changed to match the characteristics of
the workpiece. This section describes measurements of specific items, such as transparent objects,
precision-machined products, fast-moving or ultra-fine wire, multiple-pin IC lead pitch, round bars, plate-
shaped width, large-diameter round bars, film sheets, rubber rolls, shafts processed with a centerless
grinder, and stepped round bars.

6.2.1 Transparent Object Measurement

■ Measuring the outer diameter of transparent round bars


This section describes the setting items and procedures for measuring the outer diameter of a transpar-
ent round bar.

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 Transparent mode
Parameters (Measurement condition Outer diameter (segment 2)
1)

Tips
• The edge mode cannot be set.
• For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

4 Check the measurement result.

C-126 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

■ Width measurement of transparent, plate-shaped workpiece


A transparent, non-chamfered, plate-shaped (sheet-like) workpiece may not be measured because it
does not yield a sharp end-face edge signal (shadow) at its end face, producing an insufficient edge
detection level (THL) for converting the light-receiving signal to a digital signal and resulting in judgment
of E0008 (no workpiece error).

Direction of laser scanning

Ideal An edge signal cannot be obtained


edge signal from a sharp end face.

Workpiece
(transparent object)

Edge detection level (THL)

Light-receiving signal

If the measurement cannot be performed, try measure 1 or 2 below.


If the workpiece is not detected even after executing measures 1 and 2, changing the THL setting may
enable detection of the workpiece.
For details, see "■ Extension function THL settings" on page C-46.

● Measure 1: Tilt the workpiece.


Tilting the workpiece may make the end-face edge signal acuter.
The tilt may cause an error, and the measured value becomes W = W0 (workpiece dimensions) x cos θ
+ t x sin θ.

Light is bent, not received.

θ
Workpiece W
W0

C-127 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

● Measure 2: Increase the chamfering amount on the workpiece.


Increasing the chamfering amount on the workpiece may make the end-face edge signal acuter.

Workpiece

Light is bent, not received.

Tips
• Regarding the chamfering amount above (W), we recommend a larger value than listed below for each sen-
sor model.

Chamfering amount
Sensor model
(W)
LSM-02-A 0.1 mm
LSM-30-A 0.2 mm

• The appropriate chamfering amount may vary depending on the workpiece material.

Measurement example: ‌width measurement of transparent, plate-shaped workpiece

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 Transparent mode
Parameters (Measurement condition Outer diameter (segment 2)
1)

Tips
• The edge mode cannot be set.
• For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

C-128 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

3 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

4 Check the measurement result.

C-129 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.2 Outer Diameter Measurement of Precision-Machined Product


For the outer diameter of a precision-machined product like precision shafts and pin gages, the single
measurement can be performed for the GO/NG judgment of øD of the workpiece.

Workpiece example
Segment 1
øD = ø10±0.05 mm
Direction of Work-
Segment 2 (= øD)
laser scanning piece

Segment 3

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Parameters (Measurement Outer diameter (segment 2)
condition 1)
Parameters (Measurement Number of aver- Number of averaging* 512 times or more
condition 2) aging Averaging method Arithmetical average
GO/NG judge Upper lim. 10.05 mm
Lower lim. 9.95 mm
* ‌If a higher accuracy is required, select the greatest possible number of averaging. Usually, the
greater the number of averaging, the better the repeatability is.

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values and GO/NG judgment results are displayed on the home screen or detail screen
of LSMPAK.

4 Check the measurement result.

C-130 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.3 Measuring Fast-Moving Wires


With a laser beam scanning 3,200 times per second, the LSM can measure a vibrating fast-moving
workpiece at high accuracy.
In the wire drawing or coating process that controls the outer diameter, the outer diameter can be mea-
sured at all times, and the measurement result can undergo the GO/NG judgment and be output in
analog.

Workpiece example
Segment 1
øD = 0.05±0.001 mm
Direction of Work-
Segment 2 (= øD)
laser scanning piece

Segment 3

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 Scans for averaging Moving average*
GO/NG judgment method Target value and
tolerance
Parameters (Measurement condi- Outer diameter (segment 2)
tion 1)
Parameters (Measurement condi- Number of aver- Number of averaging 12 times or more
tion 2) aging
GO/NG judge Target value 0.05 mm
Upper tolerance 0.001 mm
value
Lower tolerance -0.001 mm
value
* ‌To avoid abrupt feedback, we recommend that you set the averaging method to [Moving average].

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values and GO/NG judgment results are displayed on the home screen or detail screen
of LSMPAK.

4 Check the measurement result.

C-131 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.4 Ultra-Fine Wire Measurements


This section describes the setting items and procedures for measuring the outer diameter of magnet
wire.

IMPORTANT
• For measurements of 0.3 mm or less, and especially 0.005 mm or less, use the LSM-02-A sensor.
LSM-30-A cannot be used for ultra-fine wire measurement.
• Ensure that the light in the laser scanning range is not blocked by multiple workpieces or jigs.
For ultra-fine wire measurement, the THL is optimized depending on the workpiece size. A thin workpiece (less
than ø0.05 mm) may not be detected if there are several light-shielded portions by the workpieces or jigs in the
laser scanning range.

Workpiece example
Segment 1
øD = 0.05±0.001 mm
Direction of Work-
Segment 2 (= øD)
laser scanning piece

Segment 3

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 Enable [Ultra-fine wire mode].
Parameters (Measurement condi- Outer diameter (segment 2)
tion 1)
Parameters (Measurement condi- Number of aver- Number of averag- 512 times or more
tion 2) aging ing*
Averaging method Arithmetical average
GO/NG judge Upper lim. 0.006 mm
Lower lim. 0.004 mm
* If a higher accuracy is required, select the greatest possible number for averaging. Usually, the
greater the number of averaging, the better the repeatability is.

Tips
• For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.
• Enabling the ultra-fine wire measurement limits the functions and measuring methods. For details, see
"■ Ultra-fine wire mode" on page C-29.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

C-132 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

3 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

4 Check the measurement result.

C-133 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.5 High-Precision Outer Diameter Measurement of Round Bar


(Preset Function)
When measuring the outer diameter of a round bar, the preset function allows you to perform high-preci-
sion measurements.

Tips
• The preset function sets an arbitrary value in advance for the measured value of the reference gage.
• The direction (positive/negative direction) in which the measured value is increased or decreased depends
on the type of the workpiece.

Workpiece example
Segment 1
øD = ø20.0000±0.0015 mm
* Set the direction to [0 (positive)]. Direction of Work-
Segment 2 (= øD)
laser scanning piece

Segment 3

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 GO/NG judgment method Upper/Lower limit
Parameters (Measurement condi- Outer diameter (segment 2)
tion 1)
Parameters (Measurement condi- Number of averaging Number of averaging 512 times or
tion 2) more
GO/NG judge Upper lim. 20.0015 mm
Lower lim. 19.9985 mm

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Check the measured value before the preset value is set.

4 Input the preset and direction values.


For this example, enter 20.0 for the preset value* and select plus (+) for the direction.
* Enter the nominal dimension of the reference gage. When using the calibration gage, enter the verified dimen-
sion.
» The displayed value changes to 20.0.

C-134 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

Tips
• Setting the reference gage preset value to 0.0 will allow the difference between the reference gage and
the workpiece to be obtained.
• For details on presets, see "5.2.1 Preset" on page C-97.

5 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

6 Check the measurement result.

C-135 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.6 Plate-Shaped Width Measurement (Preset Function)


When measuring the width of a plate shape, the preset function allows you to perform high-precision
measurements.
This is used for measuring a workpiece that exceeds the measuring range.

Workpiece example Reference bar


L = 50.0±0.01 mm
Direction of
* Select negative (–) for the direction value. Segment 1 W
laser scanning

L
Workpiece
Reference
surface

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 GO/NG judgment method Upper/Lower limit
Parameters (Measurement condi- Gap (segment 1)
tion 1)
Parameters (Measurement condi- Number of averaging Number of averaging 512 times or
tion 2) more
GO/NG judge Upper lim. 50.01 mm
Lower lim. 49.99 mm

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Check the measured value before the preset value is set.


In this example, the measured value of the gap with segment 1 is displayed.

4 Input the preset and direction values.


For this example, input 50.0 for the preset value and 1 (negative) for the direction value.
* Enter the nominal dimension of the reference gage.
» The displayed value changes to 50.0.

Tips
Set the direction value to 1 (negative) for gap measurements.

C-136 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

5 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

6 Check the measurement result.

C-137 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.7 Outer Diameter Measurement of Large-Diameter Round Bar


(Preset Function)
Use two sensors to measure the outer diameter of a large-diameter workpiece that is difficult to mea-
sure with only one sensor. When measuring, set the calculation presets.
For details on the calculation presets, see "5.2 Setting the Preset and Offset" on page C-97.

Workpiece example
1
øD = 150.0±0.05 mm Sensor 2
øD

1
Sensor 1

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Set the Sensor 1 and 2 as follows.
Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 2 GO/NG judgment method Upper/Lower limit
Parameter (measurement condi- Gap(segment 1)
tion 1)
Parameters (Measurement condi- Number of averaging Number of averaging 512 times or
tion 2) more

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration for each LSM.


For details, see "2.1 Launching LSMPAK" on page C-3.

3 Click [Calculation], set [SUM] as the calculation method and select the LSM.

Measurement settings Setting value


Calculation method Addition
Detailed settings Upper and lower limit Upper limit 150.05 mm
Lower limit 149.95 mm

Tips
For details on the arithmetic operations screen, see "3.5.1 Register Calculation" on page C-76.

C-138 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

4 Perform operational calibration (2 points calibration)

For details on operational calibration, see "4.2 Operational Calibration" on page C-92.

IMPORTANT
When measuring a large-diameter workpiece with two sensors stacked vertically, be sure to perform "2 points
calibration" when performing calculation calibration. Calibration cannot be performed properly with "1 point
calibration".

5 Set the calculation preset and offset.


For this example, enter 150.0 for the preset value* and select plus (+) for the direction.
* Enter the nominal dimension of the reference gage.

IMPORTANT
If operational calibration and individual calibration for the sensors are canceled, the operational preset and
offset are also canceled.

6 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

7 Check the measurement result.

C-139 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.8 Thickness Measurement of Film Sheet (Preset Function)


When measuring the film sheet thickness, use the preset function to get high-precision results.
Remove the film from the guide that is the reference gage and measure segment 1 (W0).
Next, set the film that is the workpiece and measure segment 1 (W).
The film thickness (T) is T = (W0 - W).

Tips
If W0 = 0.0 mm is replaced by zero and the direction is set to "1 (minus), then the calculation becomes
T = {W0 - (- W)} = 0.0 - (-W) = W, and the thickness is displayed as the display value.

Workpiece example Guide


Film
Thickness: T = 0.1±0.005 mm T

Direction of
laser scanning
Segment 1 W W0

Reference bar

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 GO/NG judgment method Upper/Lower limit
Parameters (Measurement condi- Gap (segment 1)
tion 1)
Parameters (Measurement condi- Number of averaging Number of averaging 128 times or
tion 2) more
GO/NG judge Upper lim. 0.105 mm
Lower lim. 0.095 mm

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Remove the workpiece (film).

4 Input the preset and direction values.


For this example, enter 0.0 for the preset value and select negative (-) for the direction.
» The displayed value changes to 0 (zero).

C-140 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

5 Mount the workpiece (film).

Tips
When the film is set, the film thickness is displayed, but the GO/NG judgment is not performed at this time.

6 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

7 Check the measurement result.

C-141 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.9 Two Items Measurement of Outer Diameter and Run-Out of


Rubber Roll (Sample Measurement)
When measuring the outer diameter and run-out of a rubber roll at the same time, use sample measure-
ment to get high-precision results.
In this example, a roller is rotated to measure its roundness to obtain the run-out width and outer diame-
ter.
The run-out T is obtained by measuring the gap with segment 1, and the outer diameter øD with seg-
ment 2 is measured while the roller is rotating. The run-out width is calculated using the sample mea-
surement range (maximum - minimum).

Tips
This example uses the reference edge for stable gap measurement. The reference bar can also be used.

Workpiece example Reference edge


Rubber roll
Diameter: øD = 25.0±0.05 mm
Run-out width T Segment 1
Number of rotations: 50 rpm
Direction
of laser Segment 2
scanning Outer diameter øD

Segment 3

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 Two items measurement
GO/NG judgment method Upper/Lower limit

C-142 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

Setting value
Measurement settings Measurement Measurement
item A*1 item B*1
Parameters (Measurement Segment 1 2
condition 1) Sample measure- No of sample 60*2 (60)*2
ment measurement
Method Range Average
Parameters (Measurement Number of aver- Number of aver- 64 times*2 (64 times)*2
condition 2) aging aging
GO/NG judge Upper lim. 0.03 mm 25.05 mm
Lower lim. 0.0 mm 24.95 mm
*1 ‌The parameter set should be selected from the following 10 combinations of patterns.
0 and 5, 1 and 6, 2 and 7, 3 and 8, 4 and 9, 10 and 15, 11 and 16, 12 and 17, 13 and 18, 14 and 19
*2 ‌The workpiece (roller) must be measured while rotating. Set the number of sample measurement
and the number of averaging according to the workpiece revolution speed.
A larger number of averaging will make the repeatability more stable. To perform high-precision
measurement, set the greatest possible number of averaging.
For details about the relationship among the number of workpiece revolutions, the number of
sample measurement, and the number of averaging, see "● Relationship among the number
of workpiece revolutions, the number of sample measurement, and the number of averaging" on
page C-144.

Tips
• In either measurement item A or B, if the number of sample measurement or the number of averaging is
changed, the other parameter set will automatically be changed to the same setting.
• For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Check that the run-out width of segment 1 and the outer diameter of segment 2 are displayed.

4 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 or click .
» Measuring will start.
» The measurement values are displayed on the home screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

Tips
If a GO/NG judgment has been set, the result of the GO/NG judgment will also be displayed.

5 Check the measurement result.

C-143 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

● Relationship among the number of workpiece revolutions, the number of sample mea-
surement, and the number of averaging
The following table shows the relationship between the number of workpiece revolutions and the num-
ber of averaging when 60 pieces of data are obtained while the workpiece rotates one full turn (60
samples every 6°). Refer to this as a rough guide.

Number of workpiece
Number of averaging Time required for each revolution
revolutions
32 100 rpm Approximately 0.6 seconds
64 50 rpm Approximately 1.2 seconds
128 25 rpm Approximately 2.4 seconds
256 12.5 rpm Approximately 4.8 seconds
512 6 rpm Approximately 9.6 seconds
1024 3 rpm Approximately 19.2 seconds
2048 1.5 rpm Approximately 38.4 seconds

C-144 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.10 Outer Diameter Measurement of Shaft Processed with a Cen-


terless Grinder (Auto-Work Detection Function)
Using the [Auto-work detection] function, perform automatic continuous run measurement of the outer
diameter (øD mm) of precision shafts on the conveyor line and perform GO/NG judgment of the mea-
surement results.

For details on the [Auto-work detection] function, see "■ Auto-work detection (set individually)" on
page C-65.
Workpiece example
Shaft
Outer diameter: øD = ø5.0±0.0015 mm
Length: L = 12 mm
Chamfer: a = 0.5 mm / b = 0.5 mm
Moving speed: V = 50 mm/s
L
a
b

(a) (b) (c) (n) øD

V mm/s

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 Auto-work detection Diameter detec-
tion
GO/NG judgment method Upper/Lower limit
Auto-work detection Scanning rate 16
Parameters (Measurement condi- Outer diameter (segment 2)
tion 1)
Parameters (Measurement condi- Number of averaging Number of averaging 512 times*1
tion 2) GO/NG judge Upper lim. 5.001,5 mm
Lower lim. 4.998,5 mm
Auto-work detection No. of meas. 1 time
Invalid time 20 ms*2
Upper lim. 5.1 mm
Lower lim. 4.9 mm
*1‌Use the following formula and set as large a value as possible.
Measurement interval < (L - 2a) / V
*2‌Invalid time > a / V

IMPORTANT
The LSM may be unable to recognize the gaps between workpieces with a small chamfer that are in close con-
tact with each other. If this is the case, use connection rods to ensure sufficient space between workpieces.
Also, allow a margin in the invalid time and the upper and lower detection limits.

C-145 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Check that there are no workpieces in the measuring region.

4 Perform the measurement.

1 Set the workpiece.


2 Click .
» Awaiting workpiece status.
» The diameter detection starts when the workpiece (a) enters the measuring region.
» If the average diameter value from 16 scans is within the setting value, the system judges that a workpiece
is present.
» After the Invalid time elapses, the outer diameter measurement starts for the workpiece (a).
» The measurement values and GO/NG judgment results of workpiece (a) are displayed on the home screen
or detail screen of LSMPAK.
» Measurement starts for workpiece (b) in the same way as the workpiece (a).
» The measurement values and the GO/NG judgment results of workpiece (b) are displayed on the home
screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.
» Workpieces are measured sequentially as they enter the measuring region.
» The measurement values and the GO/NG judgment results of workpiece (c) are displayed on the home
screen or detail screen of LSMPAK.

5 Click .
» The measurement value and the GO/NG judgment results of the last measurement workpiece are displayed
on the home screen or advanced setting screen of LSMPAK.
» Measurement ends.

6 Check the measurement result.

C-146 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.11 Measurements of Stepped Round Bars


In this example, ten stepped round bars (right diagram) are measured and statistically processed.

Workpiece example øB
Stepped round bar øA
Minor outer diameter: øA = ø6±0.01 mm
Major outer diameter: øB = ø10 h 7 mm

1 Configure the settings for measurement.


Except for settings listed below, set other settings according to the intended purpose.

Measurement settings Setting value


Common setting 1 GO/NG judgment method Upper/Lower limit

Setting value
Parameter Parameter
Measurement settings set 0 set 1
(small outer (large outer
diameter) diameter)
Parameters (Measurement Outer diameter (segment 2)
condition 1)
Parameters (Measurement Number of aver- Number of aver- 1024 times 1024 times
condition 2) aging aging
GO/NG judge Upper lim. 6.01 mm 10.0 mm
Lower lim. 5.99 mm 9.985 mm

Tips
For details about the settings for measurement, see "3.3 Measurement Settings" on page C-24.

2 Execute calibration.

For details on calibration, see "4.1 Standard Calibration" on page C-87.

3 Click the [Measurement history] tab on the detail screen.

4 Perform the measurement.

1 Set øA (the small diameter) of the workpiece.


2 Select parameter set 0 and click .
» The measurement values and GO/NG judgment results are displayed on the home screen or detail screen
of LSMPAK.
3 Set øB (the large diameter) of the workpiece.
4 Select parameter set 1 and click .
» The measurement values and GO/NG judgment results are displayed on the home screen or detail screen
of LSMPAK.
5 Change the workpiece and repeat the measurement in the same manner.

C-147 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

Tips
For details about parameter sets, see "3.3.8 Selecting Parameter Sets" on page C-68.

5 Click [View statistics] on the [Measurement history] tab.

Tips
For details on statistics display, see "■ Displaying statistics" on page C-109.

6 Check the measurement results and the statistical values.

C-148 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

6.2.12 Measurement of Narrow Gaps


Measurement of a gap narrower than one that is measured with normal gap measurement may be
unstable due to an insufficient laser beam light intensity passing through the gap (light-receiving signal
peak level-holding time).
For example, in the case of "(a) Case where light intensity need not be memorized" below, even if the
gap width t between workpieces is narrow, the laser beam passes through the gap width g above and
below the workpiece to obtain sufficient light intensity, but in "(b) Case where light intensity should be
memorized" if the gap width t is narrow, the light intensity will be insufficient to accurately detect the
peak level and measurement error will be large.
If this is the case, high-precision measurement can be achieved by memorizing the light intensity when
there is no obstacle
shielding the laser beam (e.g., workpieces, jigs).

Light-receiving
g : Gap for reference light signal

t : Gap
Light passes Light intensity detect-
Workpiece
through. able

(a) Case where light intensity need not be memorized


Light-receiving signal
peak level

Light-receiving The light intensity


signal cannot be detected be-
cause it is insufficient.

Workpiece t Gap

(b) Case where light intensity should be memorized

Normally, the LSM is detecting the light intensity all the time to automatically follow the change in light
intensity.
Memorize the light amount if the gap width g or t is less than the gap width shown in the table below.

Model name Gap width g or t


LSM-02-A 0.2 mm or more
LSM-30-A 1 mm or more

C-149 No. 99MBC150A


PART C : 6 Measure Procedure

MEMO

C-150 No. 99MBC150A


PART D
Interfaces
This part describes the interfaces for input/output.

1 Interface Overview…………………………………………………………… D-1


2 USB …………………………………………………………………………… D-3
3 I/O ……………………………………………………………………………… D-23
4 IF Module……………………………………………………………………… D-45

No. 99MBC150A
No. 99MBC150A
PART D : 1 Interface Overview

1 Interface Overview
The interfaces indicated in the table below are included on this product.

External device to
Interface Function
connect
USB connector PC This is the interface for command communica-
tion.
I/O connector Control units such as a This interface is used to control the product from
switch or PLC an external device.
IF module IF module Interface for connecting an IF module. Used for
connector communication with external devices such as
PLCs via an IF module.

Tips
When using industrial interfaces such as EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, etc., attach the optional IF module
to this product.
See below for details.
• "IF Module <EtherNet/IP> User's Manual" (separate document)
• "IF Module <PROFINET> User's Manual" (separate document)
• "IF Module <EtherCAT> User's Manual" (separate document)
• "IF Module <CC-Link IE TSN> User's Manual" (separate document)

D-1 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 1 Interface Overview

MEMO

D-2 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

2 USB

2.1 USB Specifications


This product is provided with a USB interface for communication with a PC or other external device.
The interface uses a Type-C USB connector. Use a compatible cable.
This product functions as a USB device.

2.1.1 USB Connector Specifications

Specification USB2.0 compliant


High-speed/full-speed support
Connector type Type-C

Connector pinouts
Signal Signal
Pin no. Function Pin no. Function
name name
A1 GND Ground B12 GND Ground
A2 − B11 −
A3 − B10 −
A4 VBUS Bus power B9 VBUS Bus power
A5 CC1 Configuration channel B8 −
A6 Dp1 D+ signal B7 Dn2 D- signal
A7 Dn1 D- signal B6 Dp2 D+ signal
A8 − B5 CC2 Configuration channel
A9 VBUS Bus power B4 VBUS Bus power
A10 − B3 −
A11 − B2 −
A12 GND Ground B1 GND Ground

D-3 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

2.2 USB Description of Operation


This product is recognized by the USB host as a virtual COM port.
This product can be controlled by sending and receiving commands via serial communication from the
COM port.

2.2.1 USB Command List


These communication commands are used to control LSM-CU-A.

● Command format
The command format is as follows.
<command>,<ID>,<data>,<delimiter>
The contents of each element are as follows.

Command
The length of a command is variable.
The initial letters of the send commands have the following meanings.
P: Execution
S: Setting
G: Acquisition
The response consists of the first letter of the outgoing command converted to a number.
The first character response has the following meanings.
0: No error
1: Post-execution error
2: Command data is abnormal (data content is incorrect)
3: Unable to execute
4: Undefined command received
5: Functional limitation error

Tips
• When using two items measurement, two parameter sets are paired. The paired parameter set combinations
are as follows.
– 0 and 5
– 1 and 6
– 2 and 7
– 3 and 8
– 4 and 9
– 10 and 15
– 11 and 16
– 12 and 17
– 13 and 18
– 14 and 19

ID
Fixed to 1000.

D-4 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Data
Data length is variable.
If the data contains multiple items, they are separated by commas (,) as follows.
< Ident 1>,< Ident 2>,......< data>

Tips
• Applicable items must be separated with commas (,) even if they are not present.
• Responses in binary format are not delimited with commas (,).

Delimiter
CR and LF are fixed at "0x0D" and "0x0A", respectively.

D-5 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

● List of commands
Item Send commands Response Remarks
Single run mea- PMEAS,1000,R P<parameter set num- y The output timing
surement exe- ber>,<GO/NG judgment of measurement re-
sults can be set with
cution result>,<measured value>
SCOND,1000,PRC
Execute contin- PMEAS,1000,CR and
uous measure- SCOND,1000,PRT.
ment y If GO/NG judgment is
enabled, the GO/NG
results are output.
Measurement PMEAS,1000,STOP 0MEAS,1000,STOP Ends measurement pro-
end cessing.
Upon command input,
measurement is ended
following output of mea-
surement results.
Execute LSM PMEAS,1000,CL 0MEAS,1000,CL Assorted cancellations.
cancellation Cancels measurement.
Measurement in prog-
ress at the time the
command is entered is
discarded.
Acquire FW GCF,1000 0CF,1000,* * <model name>,<ver-
version of sion>,<release date>,
LSM-CU-A. <release time>
Set and apply PCAL,1000,H,* 0CAL,1000,H,* * High calibration value
high calibration (mm or in)
value
Acquire high GCAL,1000,H 0CAL,1000,H,*
calibration value
setting
Set and apply PCAL,1000,L,* 0CAL,1000,L,* * High calibration value
low calibration (mm or in)
value
Acquire high GCAL,1000,L 0CAL,1000,L,*
calibration value
setting
Clear calibration PCAL,1000,C 0CAL,1000,C
Set calibration SCAL,1000,R,* 0CAL,1000,R,* * 1: A
 pply individually to
application each pair in the cur-
range rent parameter set
Acquire calibra- GCAL,1000,R 0CAL,1000,R,* 2: A
 pply to pairs in all
tion application parameter sets
range

D-6 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Configure pa- SCOND,1000,P,* 0COND,1000,P,* * 0 –19
rameter set
Acquire param- GCOND,1000,P 0COND,1000,P,*
eter set
Set parameter SCOND,1000,P_NAME,* 0COND,1000,P_NAME,* * Parameter set name
set name
Acquire param- GCOND,1000,P_NAME 0COND,1000,P_NAME,*
eter set name
Set controller SCOND,1000,S_NAME,* 0COND,1000,S_NAME,* * Controller name
name
Acquire control- GCOND,1000,S_NAME 0COND,1000,S_NAME,*
ler name
Set number of SCOND,1000,SMPN,* 0COND,1000,SMPN,* * 0: Set zero-run mea-
sample mea- surement
surement 1–999 (number of
Acquire number GCOND,1000,SMPN 0COND,1000,SMPN,* sample measurement)
of sample mea-
surement
Set calculation SCOND,1000,SMPA,* 0COND,1000,SMPA,* * 1: M
 aximum value
items for mea- 2: M inimum value
surement. 3: Range
Acquire calcu- GCOND,1000,SMPA 0COND,1000,SMPA,* 4: Average
lation item for
measurement.
Set averaging SCOND,1000,AVEA,* 0COND,1000,AVEA,* * 0: Arithmetical average
method 1: M
 oving average
Acquire averag- GCOND,1000,AVEA 0COND,1000,AVEA,*
ing method
Set number of SCOND,1000,AVEN,* 0COND,1000,AVEN,* * 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
averaging 128, 256, 512, 1024,
Acquire number GCOND,1000,AVEN 0COND,1000,AVEN,* 2048
of averaging
Batch save PCOND,1000,STR 0COND,1000,STR Batch save common set-
common setting ting items to EEPROM.
items If the power is turned off
without saving the set-
tings, settings revert to
their former values the
next time the power is
turned on.
Set two items SCOND,1000,SUBMEAS,* 0COND,1000,SUBMEAS,* * 0: Disabled
measurement 1: Enabled
Acquire setting GCOND,1000,SUBMEAS 0COND,1000,SUBMEAS
of two items
measurement

D-7 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Set data output SCOND,1000,PRT,* 0COND,1000,PRT,* When data output condi-
timer tions are met, measured
Acquire setting GCOND,1000,PRT 0COND,1000,PRT,* values and GO/NG judg-
of data output ment results are output
timer to USB after the set time.
* 0: Disabled
1–999: V alid (specified
in seconds)
Setting data out- SCOND,1000,PRC,* 0COND,1000,PRC,* Measurement values and
put conditions GO/NG judgment results
Acquire data GCOND,1000,PRC 0COND,1000,PRC,* are output to USB ac-
output condi- cording to the set condi-
tions tions. Output timing can
be delayed according
to the data output timer
setting.
* 0: Disabled
1: O
 utput each time
measurement ends
2: O
 utput only when
judgment is NG
3: O
 utput only when
judgment is OK
Acquire work- GCOND,1000,WORK_ 0COND,1000,WORK_ Displayed in hexadeci-
piece position POS POS,* mal
Acquire focus GCOND,1000,OPT_POS 0COND,1000,OPT_POS,*
detection posi-
tion
Set automatic SAUT,1000,T,* 0AUT,1000,T,* * 0: Disabled
workpiece de- D: Diameter method
tection P: P osition method
Acquire setting GAUT,1000,T 0AUT,1000,T,*
of auto-work
detection
Set number of SAUT,1000,N,* 0AUT,1000,N,* * 1–999
measurements
for automatic
workpiece de-
tection
Acquire number GAUT,1000,N 0AUT,1000,N,*
of measure-
ments for auto-
matic workpiece
detection

D-8 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Set invalid time SAUT,1000,D,* 0AUT,1000,D,* Specify the interval from
for automatic when a workpiece is
workpiece de- automatically detected to
tection the start of measurement
Acquire auto- GAUT,1000,D 0AUT,1000,D,* (the measurement invalid
matic workpiece time).
detection invalid * 0 –9999 (in millisec-
time onds)
Set lower de- SAUT,1000,L,* 0AUT,1000,L,* * Lower limit (mm or in)
tection limit for
automatic work-
piece detection
Acquire lower GAUT,1000,L 0AUT,1000,L,*
detection limit
for automatic
workpiece de-
tection setting
Set upper de- SAUT,1000,H,* 0AUT,1000,H,* * Upper limit (mm or in)
tection limit for
automatic work-
piece detection
Acquire upper GAUT,1000,H 0AUT,1000,H,*
detection limit
for automatic
workpiece de-
tection setting
Set "S send" for SAUT,1000,S,* 0AUT,1000,S,* During auto-work detec-
automatic work- tion, "S" is sent at the
piece detection start of measurement.
Acquire "S GAUT,1000,S 0AUT,1000,S,* Always set to disabled at
send" for auto- start-up.
matic workpiece * 0: Disabled
detection 1: Enabled
Set "E send" for SAUT,1000,E,* 0AUT,1000,E,* During auto-work detec-
automatic work- tion, "E" is sent at the
piece detection end of measurement.
Acquire "E GAUT,1000,E 0AUT,1000,E,* Always set to disabled at
send" for auto- start-up.
matic workpiece * 0: Disabled
detection 1: Enabled

D-9 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Set scanning SAUT,1000,C,* 0AUT,1000,C,* Set when using the
rate for auto- "diameter detection" in
matic workpiece "auto-work detection"
detection (number of averaging
Acquire scan- GAUT,1000,C 0AUT,1000,C,* during auto-work detec-
ning rate for tion).
automatic work- * 1, 16 (times)
piece detection
Set outlier elimi- SABO,1000,T,* 0ABO,1000,T,* * 0: Disabled
nation 1: USE1
Acquire setting GABO,1000,T 0ABO,1000,T,* 2: USE2
of outlier elimi-
nation
Set lower value SABO,1000,L,* 0ABO,1000,L,* * Lower limit (mm or in)
of outlier elimi-
nation
Acquire lower GABO,1000,L 0ABO,1000,L,*
value of outlier
elimination
Set upper value SABO,1000,H,* 0ABO,1000,H,* * Upper limit (mm or in)
of outlier elimi-
nation
Acquire upper GABO,1000,H 0ABO,1000,H,*
value of outlier
elimination
Set count for SABO,1000,N,* 0ABO,1000,N,* A warning is displayed if
outlier elimina- the number of samples
tion excluded as outliers
Acquire count GABO,1000,N 0ABO,1000,N,* exceeds [Count val.].
for outlier elimi- * Count value
nation
Set detection SEDG,1000,T,* 0EDG,1000,T,* * 0: Normal measure-
method ment as segment
Acquire detec- GEDG,1000,T 0EDG,1000,T,* mode method
tion method 1: T
 ransparent ob-
ject measurement
as segment mode
method
2: U
 ltra-fine wire mea-
surement as seg-
ment mode method
3: T
 ransparent object
& ultra-fine wire
as segment mode
method
N: E dge mode method

D-10 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Set arbitrary SEDG,1000,THL_E,* 0EDG,1000,THL_E,* * 0: Disabled
THL value 1: Enabled
Acquire arbi- GEDG,1000,THL_E 0EDG,1000,THL_E,*
trary of THL
value setting
Set THL value SEDG,1000,THL,* 0EDG,1000,THL,* * Set as a hexadecimal
Acquire THL GEDG,1000,THL 0EDG,1000,THL,* number
value
Set segment SEDG,1000,S,* 0EDG,1000,S,* * Segment number
mode location
Set edge mode SEDG,1000,E,*,* 0EDG,1000,E,*,* *,* <starting edge num-
location ber>
<ending edge number>
Function set- GEDG,1000,P 0EDG,1000,P,* * Segment number
ting: Acquire 0EDG,1000,P,*,* *,* <starting edge num-
Segment/Edge ber>
(measurement <ending edge number>
location) setting
Obtains judg- GEDG,1000,CAPFIN 0EDG,1000,CAPFIN,* * 0: Ultra-find wire mea-
ment result indi- surement not sup-
cating whether ported (LSM-30-A is
the connected connected)
sensor supports 1: U ltra-fine wire mea-
ultra-fine wire surement supported
measurement. (LSM-02-A is con-
nected)
Set I/O RUN SEXIO,1000,RUN_T,* 0EXIO,1000,RUN_T,* * 0: Single run measure-
input ment
Acquire I/O GEXIO,1000,RUN_T 0EXIO,1000,RUN_T,* 1: C ontinuous run
RUN input measurement with a
setting specified period
2: C ontinuous run
measurement
Set STB/ACK SEXIO,1000,ACK_T,* 0EXIO,1000,ACK_T,* * 0: STB
output selection 1: A CK
Acquire STB/ GEXIO,1000,ACK_T 0EXIO,1000,ACK_T,*
ACK output se-
lection setting

D-11 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Set the STB SEXIO,1000,STB_T,* 0EXIO,1000,STB_T,* * 0: Auto
length 1: 0 .1 ms
Acquire STB GEXIO,1000,STB_T,* 0EXIO,1000,STB_T,* 2: 0 .3 ms
length setting 3: 2 .0 ms
4: 5 .0 ms
5: 1 0.0 ms
6: 2 0.0 ms
7: 50.0 ms
8: 1 00.0 ms
Set the input SEXIO,1000,IN_FILTER,* 0EXIO,1000,IN_FILTER,* Input signal filter setting
software filter for I/O. Signals less than
Acquire setting GEXIO,1000,IN_FILTER 0EXIO,1000,IN_FILTER,* the setting are discarded
of input soft- (filtered).
ware filter * 2: 2  .0 ms
5: 5 .0 ms
20: 2  0.0 ms
Set the output SEXIO,1000,AN_OUTE,* 0EXIO,1000,AN_OUTE,* * 0: 0 V
voltage at the 1: 5
 V
time of no work- 2: - 5 V
piece error
Acquire the GEXIO,1000,AN_OUTE 0EXIO,1000,AN_OUTE,*
output voltage
setting at the
time of no work-
piece error
Set analog out- SEXIO,1000,AN_OUTS,* 0EXIO,1000,AN_OUTS,* * 1: 1X
put scale 2: 10X
Acquire analog GEXIO,1000,AN_OUTS 0EXIO,1000,AN_OUTS,* 3: 100X
output scale 4: 1000X
5: 10000X
Set analog SEXIO,1000,AN_OUTR,* 0EXIO,1000,AN_OUTR,* * Reference value (mm
output reference or in)
value
Acquire analog GEXIO,1000,AN_OUTR 0EXIO,1000,AN_OUTR,*
output reference
value
GO/NG judg- SJDG,1000,E,* 0JDG,1000,E,* * 0: Disabled
ment 1: Enabled
Acquire setting GJDG,1000,E 0JDG,1000,E,*
of GO/NG judg-
ment
Set type of GO/ SJDG,1000,T,* 0JDG,1000,T,* * 0: LL, LH (upper/lower
NG judgment limit value)
Acquire GO/NG GJDG,1000,T 0JDG,1000,T,* 1: L
 1–L6 (multi-limits)
judgment type 2: T
 arget value and up-
per/lower tolerance

D-12 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Set lower limit SJDG,1000,L,* 0JDG,1000,L,* * Lower limit (mm or in)
value for GO/
NG judgment
Acquire lower GJDG,1000,L 0JDG,1000,L,*
limit value for
GO/NG judg-
ment
Set upper limit SJDG,1000,H,* 0JDG,1000,H,* * Upper limit (mm or in)
for GO/NG judg-
ment.
Acquire upper GJDG,1000,H 0JDG,1000,H,*
limit value for
GO/NG judg-
ment
Set target val- SJDG,1000,t,* 0JDG,1000,t,* * Target value (mm or in)
ue for GO/NG
judgment.
Acquire target GJDG,1000,t 0JDG,1000,t,*
value for GO/
NG judgment
Set lower limit SJDG,1000,l,* 0JDG,1000,l,* * Lower tolerance (mm
value for GO/ (lower case L) or in)
NG judgment
Acquire lower GJDG,1000,l 0JDG,1000,l,*
tolerance for (lower case L)
GO/NG judg-
ment
Set upper toler- SJDG,1000,h,* 0JDG,1000,h,* * Upper tolerance (mm
ance for GO/NG or in)
judgment
Acquire upper GJDG,1000,h 0JDG,1000,h,*
tolerance for
GO/NG judg-
ment
Batch set SJDG,1000,nn,*,*,*…… 0JDG,1000,nn,*,*,*…… * <number of multi-limit
multi-limit GO/ judgment rows>,L1
NG judgment (mm or in)>,<L2 (mm or
Acquire GJDG,1000,nn 0JDG,1000,nn,*,*,*…… in)>……
multi-limit GO/ Number of multi-limit
NG judgment judgment rows: 3
 –7
Execute [Mem- PLIGHT,1000,P 0LIGHT,1000,P
orize light
amount]

D-13 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Set [Memorize SLIGHT,1000,E,* 0LIGHT,1000,E,* * 0: Disabled
light amount] 1: Enabled
Acquire setting GLIGHT,1000,E 0LIGHT,1000,E,*
[Memorize light
amount]
Apply/cancel PPST,1000,T,* 0PST,1000,T,* * 0: Cancel
preset 1: S
 tart application
Setting preset SPST,1000,*,* 0PST,1000,*,* *,* <preset direc-
tion>,<preset value (mm
or in)>
• Preset direction
P: P  ositive direction
M: N  egative direction
Acquire preset GPST,1000 0PST,1000,*,*,* *,*,* <preset direction>,
<status>,<preset value>
• Status
0:  Canceling
1:  Applying
Set preset appli- SPST,1000,R,* 0PST,1000,R,* * 1: A pply to current
cation range parameter set
Acquire preset GPST,1000,R 0PST,1000,R,* 2: A
 pply to all parame-
application ter sets
range
Apply/cancel POST,1000,T,* 0OST,1000,T,* * 0: Cancel
offset 1: S
 tart application
Setting the SOST,1000,V,* 0OST,1000,V,* * Offset value (mm or in)
offset
Acquire offset GOST,1000,V 0OST,1000,V,*,* *,* <status>,<offset val-
ue>
• Status
0:  Canceling
1:  Applying
Acquire current GSTS,1000,A 0STS,1000,A,*,*,*,*,* *,*,*,*,* <parameter set
position and number>,<measured
status (in ASCII value>,<status>,<error
format) status>,<number of aver-
aging>

Tips
For details about the
status and error status,
see "● About Status
and Error Status" on page
D-17.

D-14 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Acquire current GSTS,1000,B 0STS,1000,B,***** ***** <parame-
position and ter set number
status (in binary (4 bytes)><measured
format) value (4 bytes)><status
(4 bytes)><error status
(4 bytes)><number of
averaging (4 bytes)>
Clear error PSTS,1000,C 0STS,1000,C
status
Acquire statisti- GSTAT,1000,A 0STAT,1000,A P,①,N,②,A,③,X,④,N,⑤,
cal processing R,⑥,S,⑦
results ①: Parameter set num-
ber (integer)
②: Number of data
(integer)
③: Average (real num-
ber)
④: Maximum value (real
number)
⑤: Minimum value (real
number)
⑥: Width (real number)
⑦: Standard deviation
(real number)

IMPORTANT
During [Two items mea-
surement], only the sta-
tistical processing result
of the currently selected
parameter set number
can be obtained.
Run/stop statis- PSTAT,1000,E,* 0STAT,1000,E,* * 0: Stop
tical processing 1: Run
Acquire setting GSTAT,1000,E 0STAT,1000,E,*
of statistical
processing

D-15 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

Item Send commands Response Remarks


Clear statisti- PSTAT,1000,C,* 0STAT,1000,C,* Clears measurement
cal processing results accumulated for
results statistical processing
(clears statistical pro-
cessing memory).
* 0: Clear accumulated
measurement results
only for the param-
eter set being dis-
played.
1: C lear accumulat-
ed measurement
results for both the
parameter set being
displayed and the
paired parameter
set.
Unit settings SSYS,1000,UNIT,* 0SYS,1000,UNIT,* * M: mm
Acquire set unit GSYS,1000,UNIT 0SYS,1000,UNIT,* I (upper case "i"): in
Valid only with mm/in-
type LSM controllers

Tips
If the unit is changed, turn
the power off and then on
again.
Initialize arith- PSYS,1000,INIEEP 0SYS,1000,INIEEP Initialize settings.
metic unit EE-
PROM

D-16 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

● About Status and Error Status


The status and error statuses that can be acquired by the GSTS,1000,A USB command are as follows:
Convert the decimal number output in ASCII data format to 8 hex digits and then refer to the table be-
low.
(Example: 256 → 0x00000100)
For details about error number displayed by LSMPAK, see "1 Error Messages and Solutions" on
page F-1 in "PART F Troubleshooting".

Status
Value Status
0x00000000 Ready
0x00000001 Measuring
0x00000002 Simultaneous measurement
0x00000020 Workpiece detected (automatic workpiece detection)
0x00000100 Preset state
0x00000200 Offset state
0x00000400 Calibrating

Error status
Error number
Value Status displayed by
LSMPAK
0x00000001 Outlier elimination —
0x00000002 Outlier elimination (all) —
0x00000010 Hardware error H0007
0x00000020 Statistics buffer overflow error —
0x00000040 Calibration error E0001
0x00000080 Outlier detection warning W0001
0x00000100 No workpiece error E0008
0x00000200 Output buffer overflow error E0002
0x00000800 Hardware error H0005
0x00001000 Edge not found error E0005
0x00002000 Edge error E0004
0x00010000 Hardware error H0003
0x00020000 Hardware error H0004
0x00040000 Hardware error H0002
0x00080000 Insufficient light error E0006
0x00100000 Hardware error H0006
0x00200000 Hardware error H0001
0x00800000 Dirt detection error E0007
0x01000000 Power supply error P0001

D-17 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

2.2.2 Example of USB Command Usage


Some examples of command usage with USB connection are explained below.
For more information on how to use the commands in addition to the examples in this section, contact
your local Mitutoyo sales and service representative.

■ Measurement operation

● Pre-measurement settings
Set the number of sample measurement, calculation items, averaging method, and number of averaging
before starting measurement.
For settings, see the following.
y "3 Settings" on page C-9 in "PART C Operation"
y "2.2.1 USB Command List" on page D-4

Setting item USB command Settings


Set number of averaging SCOND,1000,AVEN,* * 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024,
Check the number of aver- GCOND,1000,AVEN 2048 (number of averaging)
aging
Set number of sample mea- SCOND,1000,SMPN,* * 0 –999 (number of sample measurement)
surement
Check the number of sample GCOND,1000,SMPN
measurement
Set the calculation items SCOND,1000,SMPA,* * 1: M
 aximum value
Check the calculation items GCOND,1000,SMPA 2: M inimum value
3: Range
4: Average

● USB data output


Output data (measurement values and GO/NG results) in accordance with the output conditions. This
command is only supported with USB output.
This function outputs data from USB after measurement when measured values meets the output condi-
tions and the set time for timer output setting has elapsed.
Setting item USB command Settings
Set output conditions for SCOND,1000,PRC,* * 0: Disabled
USB data output 1: O
 utput each time measurement ends
Check output conditions for GCOND,1000,PRC 2: O
 utput only when judgment is NG
USB data output 3: O
 utput only when judgment is OK
Set timer output for USB SCOND,1000,PRT,* * 0: Disabled
data output 1–999: V  alid (specified in seconds)
Check timer output for USB GCOND,1000,PRT
data output

D-18 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

● Measurement operation using USB


Settings Operation (command)
Cancel measure-
ment
Measuring End measurement (measurement in
method Number of Measurement
(measurement in progress progress at the
samples* start
at the time of input is valid) time the com-
mand is entered
is discarded)
Single run 0 PMEAS,1000,R PMEAS,1000,STOP PMEAS,1000,CL
measurement Or when 65535 samples
acquired
1–999 Measure once then end auto-
matically
(acquire set number of sample
measurement)
Continuous 1–999 PMEAS,1000,CR PMEAS,1000,STOP
run measure-
ment
* Measurement values are calculated from acquired samples based on calculation item settings.
When the number of sample measurement is 1, no calculation is possible, so the acquired sample
value is output as the measured value. For details, see "■ Sample measurement" on page C-57
in "PART C Operation".

Tips
• The number of measurement results output depends on the measuring method. The number of sample mea-
surement does not affect the number of measurement results.
• With single measurement, one measurement result is output.
• With continuous measurement, the number of measurement results output is the same as the number of
measurements performed consecutively from start of measurement to end of measurement.

D-19 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

■ I/O settings
Make the following settings in advance when operating from external devices that uses I/O and when
inputting to/outputting from external devices.
Settings that are used frequently are excerpted below.
For settings, see the following.
y See "3 Settings" on page C-9 in "PART C Operation".
y "2.2.1 USB Command List" on page D-4
Setting item USB command Settings
Set RUN pin SEXIO,1000,RUN_T,* * 0: Single run measurement
Check RUN pin setting GEXIO,1000,RUN_T 1: C ontinuous run measurement with a
specified period
2: C ontinuous run measurement
Select STB/ACK SEXIO,1000,ACK_T,* * 0: STB
Check STB/ACK selection GEXIO,1000,ACK_T 1: A CK
Select STB length SEXIO,1000,STB_T,* * 0: Auto
Check STB length selection GEXIO,1000,STB_T 1: 0 .1 ms
2: 0 .3 ms
3: 2 .0 ms
4: 5 .0 ms
5: 1 0.0 ms
6: 2 0.0 ms
7: 50.0 ms
8: 1 00.0 ms
Input signal filter SEXIO,1000,IN_FIL- * 2: 2 .0 ms
TER,* 5: 5 .0 ms
Check input signal filter GEXIO,1000,IN_FILTER 20: 2  0.0 ms

■ Analog output settings


With analog output from I/O, the following settings can be configured by USB commands.
Setting item USB command Settings
Set analog output reference SEXIO,1000,AN_OUTR,* * Reference value (mm)
value
Check analog output refer- GEXIO,1000,AN_OUTR
ence value
Set analog output scale SEXIO,1000,AN_OUTS,* * 1: 1X
Check analog output scale GEXIO,1000,AN_OUTS 2: 10X
setting 3: 100X
4: 1000X
5: 10000X
Set the output voltage at the SEXIO,1000,AN_OUTE,* * 0: 0 V
time of no workpiece error 1: 5
 V
Check the output voltage GEXIO,1000,AN_OUTE 2: - 5 V
at the time of no workpiece
error

D-20 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

■ Save settings
Save all settings included in common settings to EEPROM in the LSM-CU-A at once.
If settings are not saved, they are not retained and are reset when the power is turned off.
Operation USB command Settings
Batch save common settings PCOND,1000,STR N/A

D-21 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 2 USB

MEMO

D-22 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

3 I/O
The I/O interface can be used to for the following purposes.
For details, see "3.2 I/O Operation Description" on page D-28.
• Operation (external signal input)
- Start/end/cancel measurement
- Make preset setting
- Clear error
y Confirmation of measurement results
- GO/NG judgment output
- Output of measured value analog voltage
y Status verification
- Error output
- STB/ACK output
- SCAN signal output
- SYNC output (synchronous signal)

3.1 I/O Specifications

3.1.1 Terminal Block Connector Specifications


The I/O connector is on a separate terminal blocks.
Use the provided terminal block socket for wiring.

Terminal block socket specifications

Number of terminals 18 terminals


Terminal pitch 3.5 mm
Supported wire type AWG24-16 (cross-sectional area 0.2-1.5 mm2)
Strip length 10 mm

D-23 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

3.1.2 Connection Specifications

Ter-
Signal
minal Signal Signal
direc- Function
num- type*1 name*2
tion*3
ber
1 − 5-24V DC I Power supply for IO interface +5 V to +24 V
2 − GND − Ground
3 A ANOUT O Analog voltage output (from -5 V through +5 V)
4 − AGND − Analog ground for ANOUT pin
5 A SCAN O Scan waveform output (from 0 V through +5 V)
6 − SCAN_GND − Analog ground for SCAN pin
7 − N.C. − Unconnected
8 − N.C. − Unconnected
9 D LT3 O GO/NG judgment output 3 (LT3): -NG (The measured value
exceeds the limit on the minus side. NG judgment.)
10 D STB, ACK O STB : Low pulse output when the GO/NG judgment output
(Selectable) (LT1, LT2, LT3) is updated.
ACK : Low during measurement, High when measurement
ends.
11 D LT1 O GO/NG judgment output 1 (LT1): +NG (The measured value
exceeds the limit on the positive side. NG judgment.)
12 D LT2 O GO/NG judgment output 2 (LT2): OK (The measured value is
within limits.) GO judgment.)
13 D PRST I Preset operation
14 − GND − Ground
15 D ERR O Low level signal is output when an error occurs.
16 D CLER I During ready state: Low input executes the error status clear-
ing process.
During measurement: Low input executes measurement can-
cellation process (measurement at the time of input is discard-
ed).
17 D RUN I During ready state: Low input starts measurement in accor-
dance with settings.
During measurement: Depending on the [I/O RUN input]
setting, execute end measurement processing on input (mea-
surements are valid to the point of input).
*1 D: Digital signals, A: Analog signals
*2 The bar above the signal name indicates that the signal is active Low.
*3 I: Input, O: Output

D-24 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

Ter-
Signal
minal Signal Signal
direc- Function
num- type*1 name*2
tion*3
ber
18 D SYNC OSYNC signal output: Low pulse is output when measurement
starts.
Duration of SYNC signal output is the same as duration of
RUN signal input.
*1 D: Digital signals, A: Analog signals
*2 The bar above the signal name indicates that the signal is active Low.
*3 I: Input, O: Output

Tips
In two items measurement, the GO/NG judgment results of the two parameter sets are ORed for output as
LT[3:1].
LT(3:1) = (1,0,1) only when both items are GO.

■ Digital signal connection specifications


Digital input/output can output GO/NG judgment results.
It can also control operation of this product, such as starting, stopping, or canceling measurement.

IMPORTANT
• I/O GND is connected to the GND inside the LSM and to FG (the casing).
Ensure that it has a voltage level of 0 V.
• Use shielded wires for wiring, and connect the shields to FG. This can prevent malfunction due to electrical
noise and reduce electromagnetic interference caused by this product.
• For a relay or other inductive loads, implement protective measures such as a reverse voltage prevention
diode.
• A regular control relay or lamp cannot be connected. Use small capacity SSRs (7 mA or less) and LED
lamps.

● Digital input circuit


External power supply Digital input specifications
from DC5 V through
3.9 kΩ 5-24 V DC DC24 V Input format Photocoupler isolated input
(current sink) negative logic*1
1 kΩ Input resis- Limiting resistance 3.9 kΩ
Digital input signal tance (0.25 W)
External From +5 V through +24 V
power supply
GND *1 Low level: Valid signal
High level: No signal
LSM
External GND

D-25 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

● Digital output circuit


Digital output signal Digital output specifications

Load Output for- Photocoupler isolated output


mat (current sink) negative logic*1
External power supply
from DC5 V through External From +5 V through +24 V
DC24 V power supply
Output cur- Sink current 7 mA
GND rent

*1 Low level: Valid signal


LSM High level: No signal
External GND

■ Analog signal connection specifications


Analog output allows output of measured values as a voltage of ±5 V.
It can also output scan waveforms input from the sensor.

NOTICE
Be careful of electrostatic charges. If a high-voltage electrostatic charge is applied to a signal termi-
nal, it could cause a failure. Turn off the external power supply before performing wiring.

IMPORTANT
0 V is connected to FG (casing) inside the LSM, and must be at a potential of 0 V.

● Analog output
Outputs measured values with a voltage of ±5 V.
For details on analog output settings, see "■ Analog output" on page C-64 and beyond in "PART C
Operation".

- ANOUT
+ External
AGND device

Internal GND
LSM

D-26 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

● Scan waveform output


The scan waveform input from the sensor at is output as 0 V to +5 V.
For details on how to use, see "3.2.6 Scan Waveform Output" on page D-43.
SCAN_GND is the reference.

560 Ω SCAN
-
+
External
SCAN_GND device

Internal GND
LSM

D-27 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

3.2 I/O Operation Description


This section describes the functions of I/O.

3.2.1 List of I/O Functions

Tips
• Connect an external power supply for IO (from +5 V through +24 V) to terminal 1.
• Connect IO GND to terminals 2, 4, 6, and 14.

■ Device operation
Ter- Sig-
Sig-
Func- Signal minal nal
nal Function details
tion name num- direc-
type*1
ber tion*2
Preset PRST 13 D I Used to control the preset from an external device.
execu- Low input set the preset to the previously set [Preset
tion
value].
Performing preset resets the offset information (Offset
remove).

Tips
For details on the preset and offset, see "5.2 Setting the
Preset and Offset" on page C-97 in "PART C Operation".
Start RUN 17 D I y In ready state
mea- Used to start measurement from an external device.
sure- Low input starts measurement in accordance with set-
ment/ tings.
end y During measurement
mea- Used to end measurement from an external device.
sure- Depending on the [I/O RUN input] setting, execute end
ment measurement processing on input (measurements are
valid to the point of input).

Tips
• The measurement that starts when the RUN signal is input
can be selected from [Single-run] (initial value), [Continu-
ous], and [Continuous with term] in [Common setting 2] of
LSMPAK's [I/O RUN input] ( "■ I/O RUN input" on page
C-45) or USB communication command ( "2.1.1 USB
Connector Specifications" on page D-3).
• For details on measuring methods, see "■ Sample mea-
surement" on page C-57 and "6.2.4 Ultra-Fine Wire Mea-
surements" on page C-132 in "PART C Operation".

D-28 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

Ter- Sig-
Sig-
Func- Signal minal nal
nal Function details
tion name num- direc-
type*1
ber tion*2
Clear CLER 16 D I y In ready state
error/ Used to clear the error status from an external device.
cancel The error status clearing process is executed on Low
mea- input.
sure- y During measurement
ment Used to cancel measurement from an external device.
Low input executes the measurement cancellation pro-
cess (measurement at the time of input is discarded).
*1 D
 : Digital signals, A: Analog signals
*2 I: Input, O: Output

■ Confirmation of measurement results


Ter- Sig-
Sig-
Func- Signal minal nal
nal Function details
tion name num- direc-
type*1
ber tion*2
Analog ANOUT 3 A O The difference between the measured value and the ref-
output erence value for analog output is output to an external
device at a set voltage.
The analog voltage output is from -5 V through +5 V.

Tips
For details, see "■ Analog output" on page C-64 in "PART
C Operation".
GO/NG LT1 11 D O GO/NG judgment output (LT1): +NG (The measured value
judg- exceeds the limit on the positive side. NG judgment.)
ment
LT2 12 D O GO/NG judgment output (LT2): OK (The measured value
output*3
is within limits.) GO judgment.)
LT3 9 D O GO/NG judgment output (LT3): -NG (The measured value
exceeds the limit on the minus side. NG judgment.)
*1 D
 : Digital signals, A: Analog signals
*2 I: Input, O: Output
*3 For details, see "■ GO/NG judgment method" on page C-40 and "■ GO/NG judgment" on page
C-63 in "PART C Operation".

D-29 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

■ Status verification
Ter- Sig-
Sig-
Func- Signal minal nal
nal Function details
tion name num- direc-
type*1
ber tion*2
Scan SCAN 5 A O Used to output the scan waveform input to this product
wave- from the sensor to an external device.
form
The scan waveform voltage is from 0 V through +5 V.
output
Tips
For details, see "● Scan waveform output" on page D-27.
Error ERR 15 D O Used when you want an external device to detect that an
output error has occurred.
Outputs a Low level signal when an error occurs.

Tips
For details, see "■ Digital signal connection specifications"
on page D-25.
STB STB 10 D O Used when connecting this product to an external device.
output/ or The measurement status can be checked.
ACK
ACK Since this terminal is used for dual functions, select either
output
STB or ACK for use.
STB: Low pulse output when the GO/NG judgment output
(LT1, LT2, LT3) is updated.
ACK: Low during measurement, High when measurement
ends.

Tips
• For details about signals, see "3.2.4 Timing Charts" on
page D-35.
• For details on STB/ACK, see "■ STB/ACK output" on
page C-45 and "■ Set the STB length" on page C-48 in
"PART C Operation".

D-30 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

Ter- Sig-
Sig-
Func- Signal minal nal
nal Function details
tion name num- direc-
type*1
ber tion*2
Sync SYNC 18 D O A Low pulse is output at the start of measurement.
signal The duration of SYNC signal output is the same as the
output
duration of RUN signal input.
The signal can be used to synchronize measurements,
as when combining multiple controllers. Synchronous
measurement can be achieved by connecting to the RUN
terminal of the controller to be synchronized.

Tips
• This is a dedicated signal for synchronizing with other con-
trollers. Connection to other devices is not possible.
• For details on measurements combining multiple control-
lers, see "4.2 Operational Calibration" on page C-92,
"5.2 Setting the Preset and Offset" on page C-97 and "6.1.5
Measurement (arithmetic calculation) with Multiple Com-
bined LSMs" on page C-120 in "PART C Operation".
*1 D: Digital signals, A: Analog signals
*2 I: Input, O: Output

D-31 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

3.2.2 GO/NG Judgment Output


GO/NG judg-
Pin name Judgment conditions
ment
LT1 +NG The measured value is greater Upper limit value < Measured
than the upper limit. value
LT2 OK The measured value is greater Lower limit value ≤ Measured
than the lower limit and less than value ≤ Upper limit value
the upper limit.
LT3 -NG The measured value is lower than Measured value < Lower limit
the lower limit. value

Tips
When a no-workpiece error occurs, measurement stops and GO/NG judgment is turned off (LT1–LT3 all go
High).

D-32 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

3.2.3 Measurement Operation


I/O can be used to start, stop or cancel measurement. Specific operations are as follows.

Tips
Change the settings according to the measuring method you wish to execute. Settings can be changed by
LSMPAK or USB commands.

Settings Operating procedure


Cancel mea-
surement
Mea- End mea-
No of (measure-
suring sample surement
Timing Charts ment in
meth- mea- RUN pin set- Measure- (measure-
progress at
od ting for I/O ment start ment at time
sure- the time the
of input is
ment* command is
valid.)
entered is
discarded)
Single 0 Single run "● Zero run mea- RUN pulse RUN pulse or CLER signal
run measurement surement (continu- 65535 sam-
mea- Continuous ous measurement, ples acquired
sure- run measure-single run measure-
ment ment ment)" on page D-36
Continuous "● Zero run mea- RUN falling RUN rising
run measure-surement (con- edge edge or
ment with tinuous run mea- 65535 sam-
a specified surement with a ples acquired
period specified period,
single run measure-
ment)" on page D-36
1–999 Single run "● Single run mea- RUN pulse Measure
measurement surement" on page once then
D-35 end automat-
ically
(acquire set
number of
sample mea-
surement)
Con- 1–999 Continuous "● Continuous run RUN pulse RUN pulse CLER signal
tinu- run measure- measurement" on
ous ment page D-38
run Continuous "● Continuous run RUN falling RUN rising
mea- run measure- measurement with a edge edge
sure- ment with specified period" on
ment a specified page D-37
period

* Measured values are calculated from acquired samples based on the calculation item settings (aver-
age, maximum, minimum, and range). For details on how to set arbitrary calculation items and number
of sample measurement from LSMPAK, see "3.3.5 [Measurement condition 1] Screen" on page

D-33 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

C-54 in "PART C Operation".


When the number of sample measurement is 1, no calculation is possible, so the acquired sample
value is output as the measured value.

Tips
For details on each measuring method, see "3.2.4 Timing Charts" on page D-35.

D-34 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

3.2.4 Timing Charts

Tips
STB and ACK are dual-function pins, so select either function for use. The selection can be changed by LSM-
PAK or USB command.
For details, see "■ STB/ACK output" on page C-45 and "■ I/O settings" on page D-20 in "PART C Opera-
tion".

● Single run measurement


Measurement is started by RUN signal pulse input.
Measurement starts when RUN changes from High to Low. The measurement is automatically terminat-
ed after one measurement.

OFF
RUN
ON

LT[1:3]

ACK

STB

CLER
Tin Low to High
with a delay of
one averaging
Tin Tin Tad Tbo Tso time
(Measuring)
Clear Measurement start instruction End measurement Measurement data output

D-35 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

● Zero run measurement (continuous run measurement with a specified period, single
run measurement)
The start and end of measurement are given by the pulse width of RUN.
Measurement starts when RUN changes from High to Low. Measurement continues as long as RUN is
Low, and sample acquisition continues during measurement.
Measurement ends when RUN changes from Low to High. Measurement is automatically terminated
when 65535 samples are acquired.

OFF
RUN
ON

LT[1:3]

ACK

STB

CLER
Tin
Low to High
(Measuring) with a delay of
one averaging
Tin Tin Tad Tad Tso time

Clear Measurement start instruc- End-of-measurement Measurement data


tion instruction output

● Zero run measurement (continuous measurement, single run measurement)


Measurement start and end are given by one-shot pulses of the RUN signal.
Measurement starts when RUN changes from High to Low. Measurement is terminated when RUN
changes from High to Low again.
Other operation is the same as in "● Zero run measurement (continuous measurement, single run mea-
surement)" on page D-36.

OFF
RUN
ON

LT[1:3]

ACK

STB

CLER
Tin Tin
Low to High
(Measuring) with a delay of
one averaging
Tin Tin Tad Tad Tso time

Measurement start instruc- End-of-measurement Measurement data


tion instruction output

D-36 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

● Continuous run measurement with a specified period


The start and end of continuous measurement are given by the pulse width of RUN.
Continuous run measurement starts when RUN changes from High to Low. Measurement is repeated
while RUN is Low. Measurement results are output for each measurement.
Continuous run measurement ends when RUN changes from Low to High.

OFF
RUN
ON

LT[1:3]

ACK

STB

CLER
Tbo Tbc Tbc Tbc
(Measuring) (Measuring) (Measuring) (Measuring)
Tso Tso Tso
Low to High
Tin with a delay of
one averaging
Tin Tin Tad Tad Tso time

Clear Continuous run measure- Continuous run measure-


Measurement data
ment start instruction ment end instruction
output

D-37 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

● Continuous run measurement


The start and end of continuous measurement are given by one-shot pulses of the RUN signal.
Continuous run measurement starts when RUN changes from High to Low. Continuous run measure-
ment is terminated when RUN changes from High to Low again. Measurement is repeated from the start
of continuous measurement to the end.
Other operation is the same as in "● Continuous run measurement with a specified period" on page
D-37.

OFF
RUN
ON

LT[1:3]

ACK

STB

CLER
Tbo Tbc Tbc Tbc
(Measur-
(Measuring) (Measuring) (Measuring)
ing)
Tso Tso Tso
Low to High
Tin Tin with a delay of
one averaging
Tin Tin Tad Tad Tso time

Clear Continuous run measure- Continuous run measure- Measurement data


ment start instruction ment end instruction output

D-38 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

■ SYNC signal output timing


RUN signal input time (Tin) becomes SYNC signal output time (Tin) as it is, and the SYNC signal is
output.

OFF
RUN
ON

SYNC

Tin

Tad Tin

Tips
• The SYNC signal is used to synchronize measurement combining multiple controllers. Synchronous mea-
surement can be achieved by inputing the SYNC signal to the RUN pin of other controllers.
• The SYNC signal is output as a Low pulse when the controller starts measurement.
• The SYNC signal is a dedicated signal for synchronization with other controllers. Connection to other devic-
es is not possible.
• An input signal filter (filter length Tif: 5 ms by default) acts on the input signal to prevent malfunction.
• The input signal response will have delay (Tad) of about 1 to 2 times the filter length (Tif).
• The filter length (Tif) can be set to 2 ms, 5 ms, or 20 ms.
• In case of input signal instability due to electrical noise, etc., increase the filter length.

D-39 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

■ Timing chart time parameters


Parameter MIN TYP MAX Remarks
Tin Signal in- (Tif x 2 + 3 ms) − − Tin > (Tif x 2 + 3 ms) > Tad
put time The above relationships must
Tad Input − − Tif x 2 + be fulfilled.
signal 3 ms
response
time
Ter Time − − Tif / 2 −
allowed
for simul-
taneous
input
Tif Input sig- 2 ms − 20 ms Initial value: 5 ms
nal filter
length
Tso STB 0.1 ms AUTO (initial 100 ms With arithmetical average:
length value) "■ Measurement inter-
val and recommended STB
length" on page D-42
Moving average time: 2 ms
MRN Number With arithmetical − 2048 Number of scans used for
of aver- average: 1 "averaging"
aging Moving average: (Set as powers of 2)
32
Tmr Mea- With arithmetical average: (MRN × 1000/3200) Interval between "averaging"
surement [ms] ±20% runs
interval With moving average: Time required for the first
average is the same as given by the above formu-
la. Subsequent averages are at 5 ms intervals.
N Number 0 (no pre-spec- − 999 Number of samples (values
of sam- ified number of obtained by "averaging") used
ples sample mea- to calculate one measurement
surement = zero result (calculation set in [Meth-
run measure- od]).
ment)
Tbo Single − − Tmr x N + In case of zero run measure-
run mea- 3 ms ment, it is single measure-
surement ments (N=1–65535) that con-
time tinue to acquire samples until
Tbc Continu- − − Tmr x N + the measurement termination
ous run 1 ms operation is performed.
mea-
surement
time

D-40 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

Tips
• When output operations involving printers and USB, delay may be greater than the values in the table.
• There are two averaging methods for measurement data: arithmetical average and moving average.
With arithmetical averages, the measurement interval (Tmr) varies with the number of averaging (MRN). The
STB length (Tso) changes accordingly.
With moving averages, the measurement interval (Tmr) is fixed at 5 ms and the STB length (Tso) is fixed
at 2 ms, regardless of the number of averaging (MRN). For details, see "● Moving average" on page
C-37and "■ Measurement interval and recommended STB length" on page D-42 in "PART C
Operation".

D-41 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

■ Measurement interval and recommended STB length


The STB signal is output as a pulse when the judgment outputs (LT1–LT3) are updated. This indicates
that valid measurement data has been output.
The STB length indicates the validity time (Tso) of the STB signal.
When using measurement with arithmetical average, the measurement interval varies depending on the
number of averaging. The recommended STB length for each measurement interval is as follows.

Tips
• If [Set the STB length] is set to the default setting of [MR (automatic)], Tso is automatically set to the recom-
mended STB length indicated in the table below.
• Tmr in the table below indicates the averaging interval. The result of averaging is called the sample.
• When [No of sample measurement] is set to 1, the measurement interval = Tmr because there is no [Meth-
od].
• When [No of sample measurement] is set to other than 1, the measurement interval = Tmr x [No of sample
measurement].

Recommended STB length for arithmetical average

Number of averaging: MRN Measurement interval: Tmr STB length: Tso


2048 640 ms±20 % 20 ms±20 %
1024 320 ms±20 %
512 160 ms±20 %
256 80 ms±20 %
128 40 ms±20 % 2 ms±20 %
64 20 ms±20 %
32 10 ms±20 %
16 5 ms±20 %
8 2.5 ms±20 % 0.3 ms±50 %
4 1.2 ms±30 %
2 0.6 ms±30 %
1 0.3 ms±30 % 0.1 ms±50%

STB length for moving averages

Number of averaging: MRN Measurement interval: Tmr STB length: Tso


Any value (32-2048)* 5 ms±20 % 2 ms±20 %

* When the averaging method is set to moving average, the measurement interval and STB length for
the second and subsequent samples remain 5 ms and 2 ms, respectively, even if the number of aver-
aging is changed.
After measurement starts, the first sample (the first to be averaged) is performed at the same timing as
with arithmetic averaging.

Tips
• Depending on load conditions of the connected circuit, the error magnitude may be larger than the values
indicated in the table.
• Tso can be changed in [Set the STB length] of [Common setting 3] (MR, from 0.1 ms through 100.0 ms). For
details, see "■ Set the STB length" on page C-48 in "PART C Operation".

D-42 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

3.2.5 Analog Output


The difference between the measured value and the analog output reference value is output as a volt-
age.
The magnitude of the output voltage can be adjusted by setting the scale (sensitivity adjustment).
See below for details on the adjustment method.
y Setup using LSMPAK: "■ Analog output" on page C-64 in "PART C Operation".
y Setup by USB commands: "■ Analog output settings" on page D-20
y External Device Connections: "● Analog output" on page D-26

Gain Display range


[Scale] setting value
(output voltage/displayed (Maximum output voltage/Max-
(multiplier)
value) imum displayed value)
1 (1 times) 0.625 mV/0.01 μm ±5 V/±80 μm
2 (10 times) 0.625 mV/0.1 μm ±5 V/±800 μm
3 (100 times) 0.625 mV/1 μm ±5 V/±8 mm
4 (1000 times) 0.625 mV/10 μm ±5 V/±80 mm
5 (10000 times) 0.625 mV/100 μm ±5 V/±800 mm

Analog output voltage = (measured value - analog output reference value) x gain

3.2.6 Scan Waveform Output


The controller outputs the scan waveform input from the sensor (from 0 V through +5 V).
Can be used to check the optical axis (optical axis alignment and position adjustment) of separate-type
sensors.
For details on connection specifications, see "● Scan waveform output" on page D-27.
For usage examples, see "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor> User's Manual" (separate document).

D-43 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 3 I/O

MEMO

D-44 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 4 IF Module

4 IF Module
When using an industrial interface, attach the optional IF module to this product.

See below for details.


y "IF Module <EtherNet/IP> User's Manual" (separate document)
y "IF Module <PROFINET> User's Manual" (separate document)
y "IF Module <EtherCAT> User's Manual" (separate document)
y "IF Module <CC-Link IE TSN> User's Manual" (separate document)

D-45 No. 99MBC150A


PART D : 4 IF Module

MEMO

D-46 No. 99MBC150A


PART E
Inspection and Maintenance
This part describes product inspection and maintenance methods.

1 Display Check………………………………………………………………… E-1


2 Cleaning………………………………………………………………………… E-3

No. 99MBC150A
No. 99MBC150A
PART E : 1 Display Check

1 Display Check
This chapter describes the LED display of this product.

Status Controller LED indications


Operating [POWER] LED: Flashing green
[ERROR] LED: Lit in red
Normal (ready for measurement) [POWER] LED: Lit in green
[ERROR] LED: Off
Measuring [POWER] LED: Flashing green
[ERROR] LED: Off
Error [POWER] LED: Off
[ERROR] LED: L
 ist in red
Rapidly flashing red (power supply error)
No workpiece error [POWER] LED: Lit in green
(When there is no workpiece) [ERROR] LED: Slowly flashing red
Warning [POWER] LED: Lit
[ERROR] LED: Slowly flashing red

Tips
For details about error messages, see "1 Error Messages and Solutions" on page F-1 and beyond in
"PART F Troubleshooting".

E-1 No. 99MBC150A


PART E : 1 Display Check

MEMO

E-2 No. 99MBC150A


PART E : 2 Cleaning

2 Cleaning
CAUTION
Turn off the power supply before cleaning.
If you perform cleaning while the power is still on, the cleaning agent, water, etc. could get inside of
this product and cause an electric shock.

1 Check that the power supply is shut off.

2 Wipe the product with a soft, dry cloth.

NOTICE
Do not use a wet cloth, benzine, thinner, etc.
These could cause deformation or discoloration.

Tips
If the product is extremely dirty, wipe the dirt off using a cloth soaked in diluted neutral detergent and wrung
well, and then finally wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth.

E-3 No. 99MBC150A


PART E : 2 Cleaning

MEMO

E-4 No. 99MBC150A


PART F
Troubleshooting
This part describes the details of error messages and their solutions and also how to handle problems
when they occur.

1 Error Messages and Solutions…………………………………………………F-1


2 Troubleshooting and Solutions……………………………………………… F-5

No. 99MBC150A
No. 99MBC150A
PART F : 1 Error Messages and Solutions

1 Error Messages and Solutions


This chapter describes possible causes and remedies for error and warning messages displayed by
LSMPAK.

Error message

Error LED status


Possible cause Solution
number POWER ERROR
Hardware error
H0001 Processing stops for a certain Contact the agent where you pur- Off Lit in red
period of time. chased the product or a Mitutoyo
sales office.
There is a failure somewhere on
the main board.
H0002 FPGA will not start. Contact the agent where you pur- Off Lit in red
chased the product or a Mitutoyo
sales office.
H0003 Main board EEPROM cannot be Contact the agent where you pur- Off Lit in red
read/written. chased the product or a Mitutoyo
sales office.
The main board of the controller
has failed.
H0004 Sensor board EEPROM cannot Contact the agent where you pur- Off Lit in red
be read. chased the product or a Mitutoyo
sales office.
The LD*1 driver board of the
sensor has failed.
H0005 Sensor failure (inadequate light Contact the agent where you pur- Off Lit in red
emission from LD*1 or motor chased the product or a Mitutoyo
drive failure) sales office.
H0006 Unexpected current flow in LD* . Contact the agent where you pur-
1 Off Lit in red
The LD*1 driver board of the chased the product or a Mitutoyo
sales office.
sensor has failed.
H0007 The value from FPGA became Contact the agent where you pur- Off Lit in red
abnormally large. chased the product or a Mitutoyo
sales office.
The FPGA is operating abnor-
mally and outputting abnormal
counter values.
The sum of the preset and offset Clear the preset and offset.
is three digits.
Power supply error
P0001 Normal power supply (24 V) is Reevaluate the environment of Off Flash-
not being supplied. use. (Eliminate noise, etc.) ing red
(rapid)
Customer operating environ- If turning the power off and on
ment is unstable. does not resolve the problem,
The power supply voltage is low. check the power supply voltage
Surges or other adverse events for any abnormality such as low
affecting power supply. voltage or noise.
*1 LD: Laser diode

F-1 No. 99MBC150A


PART F : 1 Error Messages and Solutions

Error LED status


Possible cause Solution
number POWER ERROR
Calibration error
E0001 The wrong measurement posi- Check the settings for the mea- Off Lit in red
tion (segment/edge) is specified. surement position (segment/edge).
A value significantly different Re-set them with the same values
from the dimension of the refer- as the gage verification values.
ence gage was entered.
If the problem persists, contact the
agent where you purchased the
product or a Mitutoyo sales office.
The HIGH CAL setup value is Re-set using reference gages with
too close to LOW CAL. a dimensional ratio of at least 1.2
times.
Output buffer overflow
E0002 The output buffer for measure- Check the number of averaging, Off Lit in red
ment data acquisition over- the number of sample measure-
flowed.
ment, etc. Also, use a higher spec
PC if necessary.
"3.3.5 [Measurement condition
1] Screen" on page C-54
"3.3.6 [Measurement condition
2] Screen" on page C-59
Edge error
E0004 An odd number of edges was Contact the agent where you pur- Off Lit in red
detected. chased the product or a Mitutoyo
sales office.
Edge not found error
E0005 Scan waveform not obtained or Check that the laser is not Off Lit in red
edge not detected. blocked.
The sum of the preset and offset Clear the preset and offset.
is three digits.
Insufficient light error
E0006 The light amount is insufficient Execute [Memorize light amount] Off Lit in red
and the light amount memory under conditions where light inten-
function cannot be used.
sity is sufficient.
"3.4 Memorize Light Amount"
on page C-73 in "PART C Oper-
ation"
Dirt detection error
E0007 The protection glass is dirty. Clean or replace the protective Off Lit in red
The protective glass is stained glass.
or scratched (if the dirt detection "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sen-
function is enabled). sor> User's Manual" (separate
document)
*1 LD: Laser diode

F-2 No. 99MBC150A


PART F : 1 Error Messages and Solutions

Error LED status


Possible cause Solution
number POWER ERROR
No workpiece error
E0008 There is no workpiece corre- Check that the workpiece is cor- On Flashing
sponding to the specified mea- rectly set. red
surement point (segment/edge). (slow)
Check that segment and edge
mode are correctly set.
"3.3.5 [Measurement condition
1] Screen" on page C-54
Measurement number over error
E0009 The number of measurements Save data stored in LSMPAK and No effect
that can be stored by LSMPAK clear the measurement history.
(up to 100,000) has been ex-
ceeded.
*1 LD: Laser diode

Warning message

Error LED status


Possible cause Solution
number POWER ERROR
Outlier detection warning
W0001 The measured value exceeded Check the dimensions of the work- On Flash-
the upper and lower limits of piece and set a workpiece of the ing red
the outlier elimination function, (slow)
correct dimensions. Also, check
and the number of such values
reached the count. the upper and lower limit settings
for outlier elimination.
"■ Outlier elimination (count
target setting)" on page C-39
"■ Outlier elimination" on page
C-62
Calculation error
C0001 Cannot find the label (operation Check the label of each LSM and No effect
target) when registering a calcu- re-select the operation target.
lation.
If calculation is not required, clear
(Example: When the label of
an operation target has been the calculation setting.
changed and can no longer See "3.3 Measurement Set-
be recognized as an operation tings" on page C-24 to check the
target.)
label, "3.5.2 Editing Calculation
Settings" on page C-81 to select
the operation target, and "3.5.3
Clear Calculation" on page C-82
for clearing calculations.

F-3 No. 99MBC150A


PART F : 1 Error Messages and Solutions

Error LED status


Possible cause Solution
number POWER ERROR
C0002 An error occurred in the opera- Check for errors on the LSM No effect
tion target, making calculation which is the operation target and
impossible. clear them.
(Example: An arithmetic oper- "1 Error Messages and Solu-
ation was registered with two tions" on page F-1
LSMs, but an error occurred in
one of the LSMs, preventing the
operation from being complet-
ed.)
Statistics count overwarning
— The number of data points for Save data resulting from statis- Off Lit in red
statistical calculation results tical calculations on a regular
exceeded 100,000.
basis, and ensure that the number
of data points does not exceed
100,000.

■ About dialogs that appear when LSMPAK is started


When LSMPAK is launched, a dialog box appears if the LSM configuration has changed since the last
connection, if there is a mixture of LSMs with different unit settings, or if a communication error occurs.
For details on dealing with such situations, see "■ What to do if a dialog box appears at startup" on
page C-4 in "PART C Operation".

F-4 No. 99MBC150A


PART F : 2 Troubleshooting and Solutions

2 Troubleshooting and Solutions


This chapter describes issues that may occur with this product and how to solve them.

Issue Possible cause Solution


From setup to startup
The product does not start Setup was not correctly per- Check the setup procedure.
even when power is sup- formed. "2 Setup" on page B-3 in "PART B
plied.
Preparation"
(The [POWER] and [ER-
ROR] LEDs do not light The power supply terminals Cut the power, and ensure that the
up.) are not fully connected. power supply terminals are correctly
connected.
The supply-side power source Check the supply-side power source.
is off.
The voltage on the power-sup- Check the voltage on the power-supply
ply side is low. side (+24 VDC ±10%, 3.0 A or more).
The power cable is defective Replace the power cable.
or disconnected.
The signal cable is defective. Cut the power, disconnect the signal
cable, and supply power again. If the
[POWER] LED on this product lights up
green, the product is operating normally.
Replace the signal cable.
The sensor has failed. Cut the power, disconnect the sensor,
and supply power again. If the [POWER]
LED on this product lights up green, the
product is operating normally.
In this case, the sensor is likely faulty.
Contact the agent where you purchased
the product or a Mitutoyo sales office.
This product (the controller) Contact the agent where you purchased
has failed. the product or a Mitutoyo sales office.
The sensor makes an The scanner motor has failed. Contact the agent where you purchased
abnormal noise. the product or a Mitutoyo sales office.

F-5 No. 99MBC150A


PART F : 2 Troubleshooting and Solutions

Issue Possible cause Solution


Regarding screen displays and errors
Error messages are dis- — "1 Error Messages and Solutions" on
played. page F-1
About calibration
The calibration values are The calibration was performed Correctly perform calibration.
not reflected. incorrectly. See "4 Calibration" on page C-85 in
"PART C Operation".
The calibration gage is not set Set the calibration gage correctly.
correctly.
Reliability of measured values
There are errors in the Calibration was not performed Correctly perform calibration.
measured values. correctly. See "4 Calibration" on page C-85 in
The dimensional difference of "PART C Operation".
the calibration master is too
small.
Foreign materials are attached Remove the foreign materials attached
to the workpiece. to the workpiece.
The protective glass of the Clean or replace the protective glass.
sensor is stained or scratched. "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor>
User's Manual" (separate document)
The calibration values of the Check the calibration values of the sam-
sample workpiece used as a ple workpiece used as a master.
master are incorrect.
The optical axes are out of Align the optical axes.
alignment between the emis- "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor>
sion and reception units.
User's Manual" (separate document)
Measured values vary. The system was not sufficient- Warm up the unit for 30 minutes to 1
Measured values are ly warmed up. hour.
unstable. The number of averaging is Increase the number of averaging.
insufficient.
The protective glass of the Clean or replace the protective glass.
sensor is stained or scratched. "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor>
User's Manual" (separate document)
Foreign materials are attached Remove the foreign materials attached
to the workpiece. to the workpiece.
The measuring unit is in the Do not expose this product directly to
direct path of air from an air blowing air or sunlight.
conditioner or sunlight.
The measuring environment Measure in an environment without
is poor (vibrations, air tem- vibrations, air temperature changes,
perature changes, blowing air, blowing air, etc.
etc.).
The output of the laser diode Check the status of the [ERROR] LED.
is reduced. If the LED is blinking red, the sensor
may be faulty.
Contact the agent where you purchased
the product or a Mitutoyo sales office.

F-6 No. 99MBC150A


PART F : 2 Troubleshooting and Solutions

Issue Possible cause Solution


The potential abnormal Calibration was not performed Correctly perform calibration.
value is shown. correctly. See "4 Calibration" on page C-85 in
"PART C Operation".
The protective glass of the Clean or replace the protective glass.
sensor is stained or scratched. "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor>
User's Manual" (separate document)
Foreign materials are attached Remove the foreign materials attached
to the workpiece. to the workpiece.
When the same workpiece Calibration was not performed Correctly perform calibration.
is measured by multiple correctly. See "4 Calibration" on page C-85 in
LSMs, differences in mea- The dimensional difference of
"PART C Operation".
surement values occur. the calibration master is too
small.
Foreign materials are attached Remove the foreign materials attached
to the workpiece. to the workpiece.
The protective glass of the Clean or replace the protective glass.
sensor is stained or scratched. "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor>
User's Manual" (separate document)
The calibration values of the Check the calibration values of the sam-
sample workpiece used as a ple workpiece used as a master.
master are incorrect.
The optical axes are out of Align the optical axes.
alignment between the emis- "Laser Scan Micrometer <Sensor>
sion and reception units.
User's Manual" (separate document)
Others
Measured values vary. The installation place is poor. Install this product in a location where it
Measured values are will be subject to minimal vibration.
unstable.
If the emission and recep- — For details about the optical axis align-
tion units are separated ment, see "Laser Scan Micrometer
from the mount, how is the <Sensor> User's Manual" (separate
optical axis aligned? document).
Is the system compatible — There is no compatibility with old mod-
with older models? els.
Use this product with a sensor from the
same series.
Operation of this product This product is receiving elec- Eliminate the electromagnetic interfer-
is unstable. tromagnetic interference that ence.
y Correct measurement exceeds the requirements of
This product resumes normal operation
values cannot be ob- the EMC Directive and the UK
tained. Electromagnetic Compatibility after the electromagnetic interference is
y The [ERROR] LED Regulations. eliminated.
lights.
y USB communication
errors occur.
y This product restarts.

F-7 No. 99MBC150A


PART F : 2 Troubleshooting and Solutions

Issue Possible cause Solution


Operation of other devices This product is being used in Implement countermeasures to prevent
is unstable. other than the intended oper- electromagnetic interference with other
This product is causing ating environment.
devices.
loss of specified function- This product generates elec-
ality of other devices. tromagnetic emissions in an
industrial environment. This
product is not intended for
use outside of an industrial
environment, and its use in
residential areas or other en-
vironments may cause elec-
tromagnetic interference with
other devices.

F-8 No. 99MBC150A


PART G
Appendix
This part includes the specifications of this product and the index.

1 Specifications…………………………………………………………………… G-1

No. 99MBC150A
No. 99MBC150A
PART G : 1 Specifications

1 Specifications

1.1 Specifications

Item Specifications
Code No. 544-120 (mm type), 544-121 (mm/in switchable type)
Model number LSM-CU-A
Measuring functions*1 Segment mode 1–7 (1–3 for Transparent mode)
Edge Mode 1–255
Averaging method Arithmetical 1–2048 times
average
Moving aver- 32–2048 times
age
Transparent mode, Ultra-fine wire mode (LSM-02-A only), Two items
measurement,
Auto-work detection, Outlier Elimination,
GO/NG judge (Upper/Lower limit, Multi-limits, Target value and
tolerance),
Detect dirt on the glass, Sample measurement, Analog out,
Parameter setting (measurement conditions): 20, Work position,
Calibration, Preset, Offset, Statistical calculation,
Calculation of two or more sets, Sensor model identification, Display
unit switching (544-121 only)
Standard interface*2 Indicators [POWER] LED (green), [ERROR] LED (red)
Signal cable con- Mini D-Sub (15-pin)
nector
USB connector Type-C
I/O connector Separate terminal blocks (18 poles)
Power connector Separate terminal blocks (6 poles)
Rated power supply +24 VDC±10 %, 3.0 A or more
Protective structure (dust- This product does not conform to the IP standard*3.
proofing and waterproofing)
Operating environment Temperature From 0 °C through 50 °C
Humidity From 20 %RH through 85 %RH (no condensa-
tion)
Altitude 2000 m or lower
Storage environment Temperature From -10 °C through 60 °C
Humidity From 20 %RH through 85 %RH (no condensa-
tion)
Weight About 550 g

G-1 No. 99MBC150A


PART G : 1 Specifications

Item Specifications
CE marking/UKCA marking EMC Directive/Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations:
EN IEC 61326-1
  Immunity test requirements: Clause 6.2 Table2
Emission limit: ClassA
RoHS Directive/The Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations:
EN IEC 63000
*1 ‌There are some restrictions on the combination of measurement functions.
For details, see "● Exclusivity of items in the [Common setting 1] screen" on page C-26 and
beyond in "PART C Operation".
*2 ‌For details on optional interfaces, see "About This Document" on page 4.
*3 ‌Sensors (LSM-02-A and LSM-30-A) are IP67 rated.

G-2 No. 99MBC150A


PART G : 1 Specifications

1.2 External Dimensions Drawing

■ Main unit dimensions


Unit: mm
61.5 2.5
100

69.5
48

168 28.3

112.5

G-3 No. 99MBC150A


PART G : 1 Specifications

■ DIN rail and connector installation dimensional drawing

IMPORTANT
Signal cables may break if bent over a small radius.
Allow in installation space with minimum dimensions as indicated in the figure below.

● When using a DIN rail groove (horizontal)


DIN rail Unit: mm
(35 mm Top Hat)

Signal cable

35
(sensor accessories)

69.5
R 20

63 (28.3) 7.5

98.8

● When using a DIN rail groove (vertical)


12.8 Unit: mm

Power supply terminal


block socket
(D827-827) DIN rail
(35 mm Top Hat)

I/O terminal block socket


(D800-396)
35

Signal cable
(sensor accessories)
112.5

R 20

63 (28.3) 7.5

98.8

G-4 No. 99MBC150A


PART G : 1 Specifications

G-5 No. 99MBC150A


INDEX

INDEX
A Error message................................................. F-1
Exclusivity of items in the [Common setting 1]
About Status and Error Status....................... D-17 screen.........................................................C-26
Analog output..................................... C-64, D-43 Extension function THL settings................... C-46
Analog signal connection specifications........D-26
Automatic adjustment.................................... C-73 G
Auto-work detection............................ C-32, C-65
Gap measurement....................................... C-115
Averaging..................................................... C-35
GO/NG judgment.......................................... C-63
GO/NG judgment method............................. C-40
C
GO/NG judgment output............................... D-32
Calculation................................................... C-120
Calibration.................................................... C-85 H
[Calibration] tab............................................. A-27
Help function................................................. A-29
Canceling calibration.....................................C-91
High-precision outer diameter measurement of
[Check settings] screen................................ C-66 round bar.................................................. C-134
Cleaning.......................................................... E-3 Home screen................................................. A-14
[Common setting 1] screen.................. C-11, C-26
[Common setting 2] screen................. C-12, C-44 I
[Common setting 3] screen.................. C-13, C-46 IF module...............................................A-5, D-45
Communication method.......................B-11, C-20 Initialization of settings.................................. C-71
Confirming Device Information....................... C-8 I/O..................................................................D-23
Confirming measured values....................... C-108 I/O RUN input............................................... C-45
Confirming statistics.................................... C-109 I/O device connection...................................... B-7
Connection of power supply terminal wires and List of I/O functions........................................D-28
power supply.................................................B-9
I/O terminal block socket.................................B-4
Continuous run measurement..................... C-107
Controller......................................... A-3, A-4, A-9
L
Language.......................................................C-20
D
Large diameter measurement...................... C-123
Detail screen.................................................. A-18
Laser Scan Micrometer................................... A-1
Detect dirt on the glass................................. C-48
LED indications................................................ E-1
Detection method..........................................C-28
Loading settings files........................... C-70, C-83
Digital signal connection specifications.........D-25
LSM................................................................. A-1
LSMPAK.......................................................... A-1
E
About dialogs that appear when LSMPAK is
Edge Mode................................................... C-56 started........................................................... F-4
[Edit parameter set] screen........................... C-50 Installing LSMPAK......................................... B-15
Effect of reflected light.................................. C-94 LSMPAK overview......................................... A-13
[Environmental setting] screen.............. C-9, C-19 Launching LSMPAK........................................C-3

Index-1 No. 99MBC150A


INDEX

Example of the LSM system configuration...... A-3 [Preset/Offset] tab......................................... A-28

M R
[Measurement condition 1] screen...... C-14, C-54 Register calculation....................................... C-76
[Measurement condition 2] screen...... C-17, C-59 Run-out measurement................................. C-116
Measurement flow........................................... C-1
[Measurement history] tab............................. A-22 S
Measurement mode..................................... C-105 Sample measurement....................... C-57, C-142
Measurement of narrow gaps...................... C-149 Saving settings files............................ C-69, C-82
Measurement operation................................ D-33 Scan waveform output.................................. D-43
Measurement principles.................................. A-2 Security function............................................C-22
Measurement settings...................................C-24 Segment mode............................................. C-56
Measurements of stepped round bars......... C-147 Selecting parameter sets.............................. C-68
Measuring fast-moving wires....................... C-131 Sensor..................................................... A-3, A-4
Measuring method....................................... C-113 Sensor connection...........................................B-5
Memorize light amount.................................. C-73 Set the input software filter........................... C-48
[Memorize light amount] tab.......................... A-26 [Setting information] tab................................. A-20
Settings.......................................................... C-9
N Settings list..................................................... C-9
Number of averaging.................................... C-60 Setting the application range of calibration, pre-
set/offset.................................................... C-49
O Setting the preset and offset..........................C-97
Setting the workpiece................................... C-95
Offset................................................. A-28, C-102
Setup............................................................... B-3
Operational calibration................................. C-92
Single run measurement............................. C-105
Orthogonal measurement............................ C-121
Socket Installation...........................................B-4
Outer diameter measurement of a large-diameter
round bar.................................................. C-138 Standard calibration..................................... C-87
Outer diameter measurement of precision-ma- STB/ACK output........................................... C-45
chined product.......................................... C-130 Set the STB length....................................... C-48
Outer diameter measurement of shaft processed Storage location of settings............................. A-7
with a centerless grinder........................... C-145
Storage of measured values........................ C-110
Outlier elimination............................... C-39, C-62
Output at no workpiece error........................ C-45
T
Thickness measurement............................. C-118
P
Thickness measurement of film sheet......... C-140
Parallel measurements................................ C-120
Timing charts................................................ D-35
Part names and functions................................ A-9
Transparent mode..........................................C-27
PC connection.................................................B-6
Transparent object measurement................ C-126
Plate-shaped width measurement............... C-136
Two items measurement................................C-31
Power supply terminal block socket.................B-4
Two items measurement of outer diameter and
Preset.... A-28, C-97, C-134, C-136, C-138, C-140 run-out of rubber roll................................. C-142

Index-2 No. 99MBC150A


INDEX

U
Ultra-fine wire measurements...................... C-132
Ultra-fine wire mode......................................C-29
Unit................................................................ C-21
USB................................................................ D-3
Example of USB command usage................ D-18
USB command list.......................................... D-4
[Use the previous value (Previous value update)]
mode........................................................... C-74

W
Warning message............................................ F-1
Workpiece................................................... C-145
[Work position (parallel)]................................ A-25
[Work position] tab......................................... A-25
[Work position (up and down)]....................... A-25

Z
Zero-run measurement................................ C-106

Index-3 No. 99MBC150A


INDEX

Index-4 No. 99MBC150A


SERVICE NETWORK
*As of June 2023

Europe Coventry M³ Solution Centre


Mitutoyo Europe GmbH Unit6, Banner Park, Wickmans Drive, Coventry,
West Midlands CV4 9XA, UNITED KINGDOM
Borsigstrasse 8-10, 41469 Neuss, GERMANY
TEL: 44 (0)2476 426300
TEL: 49 (0)2137 102-0 FAX: 49 (0)2137 102-351
Halifax M³ Solution Centre
Mitutoyo CTL Germany GmbH
Lowfields Business Park, Navigation Close, Elland,
Von-Gunzert-Strasse 17, 78727 Oberndorf, GERMANY
West Yorkshire HX5 9HB, UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: 49 (0)7423 8776-0 FAX: 49 (0)7423 8776-99
TEL: 44 (0)1422 375566
KOMEG Industrielle Messtechnik GmbH
East Kilbride M³ Solution Centre
Zum Wasserwerk 3, 66333 Völklingen, GERMANY
The Bairds Building, Rankine Avenue, Scottish
TEL: 49 (0)6898 91110 FAX: 49 (0)6898 9111100 Enterprise Technology Park, East Kilbride G75
0QF, UNITED KINGDOM
Germany
TEL: 44 (0)1355 581170
Mitutoyo Deutschland GmbH
Borsigstrasse 8-10, 41469 Neuss, GERMANY France
TEL: 49 (0)2137 102-0 FAX: 49 (0)2137 86 85 Mitutoyo France
M³ Solution Center Hamburg Paris Nord 2-123 rue de la Belle Etoile, BP 59267
ROISSY EN FRANCE 95957 ROISSY CDG
Tempowerkring 9·im HIT-Technologiepark 21079 CEDEX, FRANCE
Hamburg, GERMANY
TEL: 33 (0)149 38 35 00
TEL: 49 (0)40 791894-0 FAX: 49 (0)40 791894-50
M³ Solution Center LYON
M³ Solution Center Berlin
Parc Mail 523, cours du 3ème millénaire, 69791
Ernst-Lau-Straße 6, 12489 Berlin, GERMANY Saint-Priest, FRANCE
TEL:49(0)30 2611 267 FAX: 49 30 67988729 TEL: 33 (0)149 38 35 70
M³ Solution Center Eisenach M³ Solution Center STRASBOURG
Neue Wiese 4, 99817 Eisenach,GERMANY Parc de la porte Sud, Rue du pont du péage,
TEL: 49 (0)3691 88909-0 FAX: 49 (0)3691 88909-9 67118 Geispolsheim, FRANCE
M³ Solution Center Ingolstadt TEL: 33 (0)149 38 35 80
Marie-Curie-Strasse 1A, 85055 Ingolstadt, GERMANY M³ Solution Center CLUSES
TEL: 49 (0)841 954920 FAX: 49 (0)841 9549250 290 Avenue des Lacs, 74950 Scionzier,
FRANCE
M³ Solution Center Leonberg
TEL: 33 (0)1 49 38 35 90
Am Längenbühl 3, 71229 Leonberg, GERMANY
TEL: 49 (0)7152 6080-0 FAX: 49 (0)7152 608060 M³ Solution Center TOULOUSE
Aeroparc Saint Martin Cellule B08 ZAC de Saint
Mitutoyo Deutschland GmbH - Small Tool
Martin du Touch 12 rue de Caulet 31300
Sales Division
Toulouse, FRANCE
Heidenheimer Strasse 14, 71229 Leonberg, GERMANY
TEL: 33 (0)1 49 38 42 90
TEL: 49 (0)7152 9237-0 FAX: 49 (0)7152 9237-29
M³ Solution Center RENNES
U.K. 2, rue Claude Chappe, PA le Vallon - ZAC
Mitutoyo (UK) Ltd. HQ Mivoie, 35230 Noyal-Châtillon-sur-Seiche,
FRANCE
Joule Road, West Point Business Park,
Andover, Hampshire SP10 3UX, UNITED KINGDOM TEL: 33 (0)1 49 38 42 10
TEL: 44 (0)1264 353123 FAX: 44 (0)1264 354883

App-1
Italy Mitutoyo Scandinavia AB / M³ Solution Cen-
ter Värnamo
Mitutoyo Italiana S.r.l.
Kalkstensvägen 7, 331 44 Värnamo, SWEDEN
Corso Europa, 7 - 20045 Lainate (Ml), ITALY
TEL: 46 (0)8 594 109 50
TEL: 39 02 935781 FAX: 39 02 93578255
M³ Solution Center BOLOGNA Switzerland
Via dei Carpini1/A - 40011 Anzola Emilia (BO), ITALY Mitutoyo (Schweiz) AG
TEL: 39 02 93578215 FAX: 39 02 93578255 Steinackerstrasse 35, 8902 Urdorf, SWITZERLAND
M³ Solution Center CHIETI TEL: 41 (0)447361150
Contrada Santa Calcagna - 66020 Rocca S. Mitutoyo (Suisse) SA
Giovanni (CH), ITALY Rue Galilée 4, 1400 Yverdon-les Bains, SWITZERLAND
TEL: 39 02 93578280 FAX: 39 02 93578255 TEL: 41 (0)244259422
M³ Solution Center PADOVA
Poland
Via G. Galilei 21/F - 35035 Mestrino (PD), ITALY
Mitutoyo Polska Sp.z o.o.
TEL: 39 02 93578268 FAX: 39 02 93578255
Ul.Graniczna 8A, 54-610 Wroclaw, POLAND
Netherlands TEL: 48 (0)71354 83 50 FAX: 48 (0)71354 83 55
Mitutoyo Nederland B.V.
Czech Republic
Storkstraat 30, 3905 KX Veenendaal,
THE NETHERLANDS Mitutoyo Česko s.r.o.
TEL: 31(0)318-534911 Dubská 1626, 415 01 Teplice, CZECH REPUBLIC
TEL: 420 417-514-011 Email: info@mitutoyo.cz
Mitutoyo Nederland B.V. / M³ Solution Center
Enschede Mitutoyo Česko s.r.o. M³ Solution Center Ivančice
Institutenweg 50, 7521 PK Enschede, Ke Karlovu 62/10, 664 91 Ivančice, CZECH REPUBLIC
THE NETHERLANDS TEL: 420 417-514-011 Email: info@mitutoyo.cz
TEL: 31(0)318-534911
Mitutoyo Česko s.r.o. M³ Solution Center
Mitutoyo Nederland B.V. / M³ Solution Center Ostrava Mošnov
Eindhoven Mošnov 314, 742 51 Mošnov, CZECH REPUBLIC
De Run 1115, 5503 LB Veldhoven, TEL: 420 417-514-050 Email: info@mitutoyo.cz
THE NETHERLANDS
TEL: 31(0)318-534911 Mitutoyo Česko s.r.o. Slovakia Branch
Hviezdoslavova 124, 017 01 Povážská
Mitutoyo Research Center Europe B.V. Bystrica, SLOVAKIA
De Rijn 18, 5684 PJ Best, THE NETHERLANDS TEL: 421 948-595-590 Email: info@mitutoyo.sk
TEL:31(0)499-320200 FAX:31(0)499-320299
Hungary
Belgium
Mitutoyo Hungária Kft.
Mitutoyo Belgium N.V. / M³ Solution Center Galamb József utca 9, 2000 Szentendre, HUNGARY
Melsele
TEL: 36 (30) 6410210
Schaarbeekstraat 20, B-9120 Melsele, BELGIUM
TEL: 32 (0)3-2540444 Romania
Mitutoyo Romania SRL
Sweden
1A Drumul Garii Odai Street, showroom, Ground
Mitutoyo Scandinavia AB Floor, 075100 OTOPENI-ILFOV, ROMANIA
Släntvägen 6, 194 61 Upplands Väsby, SWEDEN TEL: 40 (0)311012088 FAX: +40 (0)311012089
TEL: 46 (0)8 594 109 50
Showroom in Brasov
Mitutoyo Scandinavia AB / M³ Solution Cen- Strada Ionescu Crum Nr.1, Brasov Business
ter Alingsås Park Turnul 1, Mezanin, 500446
Ängsvaktaregatan 3A, 441 38 Alingsås, SWEDEN Brasov-Judetul Brasov, ROMANIA
TEL: 46 (0)8 594 109 50 TEL/FAX: 40 (0)371020017

App-2
Finland Indonesia
Mitutoyo Scandinavia AB Finnish Branch PT. Mitutoyo Indonesia
Viherkiitäjä 2A, 33960, Pirkkala, FINLAND Head Office / M³ Solution Center
TEL: 358 (0)40 355 8498 Jalan Sriwijaya No.26 Desa cibatu Kec. Cikarang
Selatan Kab. Bekasi 17530, INDONESIA
Austria TEL: (62)21-2962 8600 FAX: (62)21-2962 8604
Mitutoyo Austria GmbH
Batam Branch Office
Salzburger Straße 260 / 3 A-4600 Wels, AUSTRIA
Business Center Adhya Building 3rd Floor Kom-
TEL: 43 (0)7242 219 998 pleks Permata Niaga Blok A No. 1, Jalan jendral
Mitutoyo Austria GmbH Goetzis Regional Sudirman Kelurahan Sukajadi, Kecamatan Bat-
showroom am Kota, Kepulauan Riau 29444, INDONESIA
Lastenstrasse 48a, 6840 Götzis, AUSTRIA TEL: (62)-778-4888000

Singapore Vietnam
Mitutoyo Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd. Mitutoyo Vietnam Co., Ltd
Head office / M³ Solution Center Hanoi Head Office / M³ Solution Center
24 Kallang Avenue, Mitutoyo Building, 1st & 2nd floor, MHDI Building, No. 60 Hoang Quoc
SINGAPORE 339415 Viet Road, Nghia Do Ward, Cau Giay District, Hanoi,
TEL:(65)62942211 FAX:(65)62996666 VIETNAM
TEL:(84)24-3768-8963 FAX:(84)24-3768-8960
Malaysia
Ho Chi Minh City Branch Office / M³ Solution Center
Mitutoyo (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
Unit No. B-00.07, Ground Floor, C1 Building, No.
Kuala Lumpur Head Office / M³ Solution Center 6, Street D9, An Loi Dong Ward, Thu Duc City,
Mah Sing Integrated Industrial Park, 4, Jalan Utarid U5/14, Ho Chi Minh City, VIETNAM
Section U5, 40150 Shah Alam, Selangor, MALAYSIA TEL:(84)28-3840-3489 FAX:(84)28-3840-3498
TEL:(60)3-78459318 FAX:(60)3-78459346
Hai Phong City Branch Office
Penang Branch office / M³ Solution Center Room 511, 5th Floor, Thanh Dat 3 Building, No. 4
30, Persiaran Mahsuri 1/2, Sunway Tunas, 11900 Le Thanh Tong Street, May To Ward, Ngo Quyen
Bayan Lepas, Penang, MALAYSIA District, Hai Phong City, VIETNAM
TEL:(60)4-6411998 FAX:(60)4-6412998 TEL:(84)22-5398-9909
Johor Branch office / M³ Solution Center Philippines
70 (Ground Floor), Jalan Molek 1/28, Taman
Mitutoyo Philippines, Inc.
Molek, 81100 Johor Bahru, Johor, MALAYSIA
Head Office / M³ Solution Center
TEL:(60)7-3521626 FAX:(60)7-3521628
Unit 1B & 2B LTI, Administration Building 1, Annex 1, North
Thailand Main Avenue, Laguna Technopark, Binan Laguna 4024,
PHILIPPINES
Mitutoyo (Thailand) Co., Ltd.
TEL/FAX:(63) 49 544 0272
Bangkok Head Office / M³ Solution Center
76/3-5, Chaengwattana Road, Kwaeng Anusaowaree, India
Khet Bangkaen, Bangkok 10220, THAILAND
Mitutoyo South Asia Pvt. Ltd. Head Office
TEL:(66)2080 3500 FAX:(66)2521 6136
C-122, Okhla Industrial Area, Phase-l,
Chonburi Branch / M³ Solution Center New Delhi-110 020, INDIA
7/1, Moo 3, Tambon Bowin, Amphur Sriracha, TEL: (91) 11-40578485/86
Chonburi 20230, THAILAND
MSA Technical Center
TEL:(66)2080 3563 FAX:(66)3834 5788
Plot no. 65, Ground Floor, Udyog Vihar, Phase-4 Gurga-
ACC Branch / M³ Solution Center on, Haryana - 122016, INDIA
122/8, 122/9, Moo 6, Tambon Donhuaroh, Amphur TEL : (91) 124–2340286/287
Muangchonburi, Chonburi 20000, THAILAND
TEL:(66)2080 3565

App-3
Mumbai Region Head office Busan Office / M³ Solution Center
303, Sentinel Hiranandani Business Park Powai, (3150-3, Daejeo 2-dong) 8,Yutongdanji 1-ro
Mumbai-400 076, INDIA 49beon-gil, Gangseo-gu, Busan, 46721 KOREA
TEL: (91) 22-25700684/685/837/839 TEL:82(51)324-0103 FAX:82(51)324-0104
Pune Office / M³ Solution Center Daegu Office / M³ Solution Center
G4/G5, Pride Kumar Senate, Off. Senapati Bapat (Galsan-dong, Daegu Business Center), 301-Ho, 217,
Road, Pune-411 016, INDIA Seongseogongdan-ro, Dalseo-gu, Daegu 42704 KOREA
TEL:(91) 20-25660043/44/45 TEL:82(53)593-5602 FAX:82(53)593-5603
Ahmedabad Office / M³ Solution Center China
A-104 & A-105, First Floor, Solitaire Corporate
Mitutoyo Measuring Instruments (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
Park, Near Divya Bhaskar Press, S.G. Road,
Ahmedabad - 380 015, INDIA 8th Floor, Tower 1 Lujiazui Jinkong Square
No.1788/1800 Century Ave., Pudong New Dis-
TEL: (91) 079 - 29704902/903
trict, Shanghai 200122, CHINA
Bengaluru Region Head office / M³ Solution Center TEL:86(21)5836-0718 FAX:86(21)5836-0717
116/117-2, Ground Floor, Sy. No. 93 & 94, 3rd
Suzhou Office / M³ Solution Center China (Suzhou)
Phase, Peenya Industrial Area, Bengaluru-560
058, INDIA 1/2 Floor, Building 4, No.175 Songbei Road,
Suzhou Free Trade Zone, Suzhou City, Jiangsu
TEL: (91) 80-25630946/47/48/49
215000, CHINA
Coimbatore Office TEL:86(512)6522-1790 FAX:86(512)6251-3420
Regus, Srivari Srimath, 3rd Floor, Door No:1045,
Wuhan Office / M³ Solution Corner
Avinashi Road, Coimbatore - 641 018,INDIA
Room 1701, Wuhan Wanda Center, No. 96,
TEL: (91) 9345005663
Linjiang Road, Wuchang District, Wuhan
Chennai Office / M³ Solution Center Hubei 430060, CHINA
No. 624, Anna Salai Teynampet, Chennai-600 018, INDIA TEL:86(27)8544-8631 FAX:86(27)8544-6227
TEL: (91) 44-24328823/24/25 Chengdu Office
Kolkata Office Room 1-102, 1st Floor, Unit 1, Building 1, No. 24,
Unit No. 1208,Om Tower, 32,J.L.Nehru Road, Wannian Road (Wanniancang Cool), Chenghua
Kolkata-700 071, INDIA District, Chengdu City, Sichuan 610056, CHINA
TEL: (91) 33-22267088/40060635/22266817 TEL:86(28)8671-8936 FAX:86(28)8671-9086
Hangzhou Office
Taiwan
Room 804, Eastern International Business Cen-
Mitutoyo Taiwan Co., Ltd. / M³ Solution Center Taipei ter Building 1, No.600 Jinsha Road of
4F., No.71, Zhouzi St., Neihu Dist.,Taipei City 114, Hangzhou Economic and Technological
TAIWAN Development Zone, 310018, CHINA
TEL:886(2)5573-5900 FAX:886(2)8752-3267 TEL: 86(571)8288-0319 FAX: 86(571)8288-0320
Taichung Branch / M³ Solution Center Taichung Tianjin Office / M³ Solution Center China
1F., No. 299, Gaotie 1st Rd., Wuri Dist., Taichung (Tianjin)
City 414, TAIWAN Room D 12/F, TEDA Building, No.256 Jie-fang
TEL:886(4)2338-6822 FAX:886(4)2338-6722 Nan Road Hexi District,Tianjin 300042, CHINA
TEL:86(22)5888-1700 FAX:86(22)5888-1701
Kaohsiung Branch / M³ Solution Center Kaohsiung
1F., No.31-1, Haibian Rd., Lingya Dist., Changchun Office
Kaohsiung City 802, TAIWAN Room 815, 8F, Building A1, Upper East
TEL:886(7)334-6168 FAX:886(7)334-6160 International No.3000 Dongsheng Street,
Erdao District, Changchun, Jilin, 130031, CHINA
South Korea TEL:86(431)8192-6998 FAX:86(431)8192-6998
Mitutoyo Korea Corporation Chongqing Office
Head Office / M³ Solution Center Room 1312, Building 3, Zhongyu Plaza, No.86,
(Sanbon-Dong, Geumjeong High View Build.), 6F, 153-8, Hongjin Avenue,Longxi Street, Yubei District,
Ls-Ro, Gunpo-Si, Gyeonggi-Do, 15808 KOREA Chongqing, 400000, CHINA
TEL:82(31)361-4200 FAX:82(31)361-4201 TEL:86(23)6595-9950 FAX:86(23)6595-9950

App-4
Qingdao Office Mitutoyo Measuring Technology (Suzhou) Co., Ltd.
Room 638, 6F, No.192 Zhengyang Road, Chengyang 1/2 Floor, Building 4, No.175 Songbei Road,
District, Qingdao, Shandong, 266109, CHINA Suzhou Free Trade Zone, Suzhou City, Jiangsu
TEL:86(532)8096-1936 FAX:86(532)8096-1937 215000, CHINA
TEL:86(512)6252-2660 FAX:86(512)6252-2580
Xi’an Office
Room 805, Xi’an International Trade Center, No. USA
196 Xiaozhai East Road, Xi’an, 710061, CHINA
Mitutoyo America Corporation
TEL:86(29)8538-1380 FAX:86(29)8538-1381
965 Corporate Blvd., Aurora, IL 60502, U.S.A.
Dalian Office / M³ Solution Center China TEL:1-(630)820-9666 Toll Free No. 1-888-648-8869
(Dalian) FAX:1-(630)978-3501
Room A-106 Shuijing SOHO,No.16 Harbin Road,Eco-
nomic Development Zone,Dalian, 116600 CHINA Headquarters (Aurora) / M³ Solution Center
TEL:86(411)8718 1212 FAX:86(411)8754-7587 965 Corporate Blvd., Aurora, IL 60502, U.S.A.

Zhengzhou Office Seattle (Renton) Office / M³ Solution Center


Room1801,18/F,Unit1,Building No.23, Shangwu Inner 1000 SW 34th St. Suite G, Renton,
Ring Road, Zhengdong New District,Zhengzhou City, WA 98057 U.S.A.
Henan 450018, CHINA TEL:1-(888)-648-8869
TEL:86(371)6097-6436 FAX:86(371)6097-6981 Houston Office / M³ Solution Center
Dongguan Office / M³ Solution Center China 4560 Kendrick Plaza Drive Suite 120 Houston,
(Dongguan) TX 77032, U.S.A.
Room 801, No 65, Chang'an Section Guanchang TEL:1-(888)-648-8869 FAX:1-(281)227-0937
Road, Chang'an Town, Dongguan City, Guang-
dong 523841, CHINA Cincinnati (Mason) Office / M³ Solution
Center
TEL:86(769)8541 7715 FAX:86(769)-8541 7745
6220 Hi-Tek Ct., Mason, OH 45040, U.S.A.
Fuzhou Office TEL:1-(888)-648-8869 FAX:1-(513)754-0718
Unit 03, 7th floor of East Tower, Sansheng Internation-
al Center, No.118 Wusi Road, Gulou Distrit, Fuzhou Detroit (Novi) Office / M³ Solution Center
City, Fujian 350001, CHINA 46850 Magellan Drive, Suite 100 Novi, MI 48377, U.S.A.
TEL: 86 (591) 8761 8095 TEL:1-(888)-648-8869 FAX: 1-(248)-926-0928
FAX: 86 (591) 8761 8096
Los Angeles (City of Industry) Office / M³
Changsha Office Solution Center
Room 2207, Building 1, Shiner International Plaza, 16925 E. Gale Ave., City of Industry, CA 91745, U.S.A.
No. 88, Kaiyuan Middle Road, Changsha City, Hunan TEL:1-(888)-648-8869 FAX:1-(626)369-3352
410100, CHINA
Charlotte (Huntersville) Office / M³ Solution
TEL: 86 (731) 8401 9276
Center
FAX: 86 (731) 8401 9376
11515 Vanstory Dr., Suite 140, Huntersville, NC
Changzhou Office 28078, U.S.A.
Room 1502, Joint Financial Tower, No.255, Tongjiang TEL:1-(888)-648-8869 FAX:1-(704)875-9273
North Road, Tianning District, Changzhou City, Jiang-
su 2130002, CHINA Boston (Marlborough) Office / M³ Solution
Center
TEL:86(519)8815 8319 FAX:86(519)8815 8319
753 Forest Street, Suite 110, Marlborough,
Wenzhou Office MA 01752, U.S.A.
Room 512, Building 4, Xinjingdujiayuan, Sanyang TEL:1-(888)648-8869 FAX:1-(508)485-0782
Street, Ouhai District, Wenzhou City, Zhejiang 325014,
CHINA Mitutoyo America Corporation Calibration Lab
TEL:86(577)8641 5280 965 Corporate Blvd., Aurora, IL 60502, U.S.A.
TEL:1-(888)-648-8869 FAX:1-(630)978-6477
Shunde Office
Room 1603, Buliding 26, Vanke Golden Riverside Mituotyo America Corporation CT-Lab
Plaza Phase II, No.13 Mid DeSheng Road, ShunDe Chicago
District, Foshan City, Guangdong 528300, CHINA 965 Corporate Blvd., Aurora, IL 60502, U.S.A.
TEL/FAX: 86(757)2228 8621 TEL: 1-(888)-648-8869 FAX: 1-(630)-820-3418

App-5
Mitutoyo Research & Development America, Mexico
Inc.
Mitutoyo Mexicana, S.A. de C.V.
11533 NE 118th St., Kirkland,
Industria Elēctrica No.15, Parque Industrial, Nau-
WA 98034-7111, U.S.A.
calpan de Juārez, Estado de Mēxico C.P.53370,
TEL:1-(425)821-3906 FAX:1-(425)821-32280 MÉXICO
Mitutoyo Research & Development America, TEL: 52 (01-55) 5312-5612
Inc. - California Office FAX: 52 (01-55) 5312-3380
16925 Gale Ave. City of Industry, Monterrey Office / M³ Solution Center
CA 91745-1806 U.S.A.
Blv. Interamericana No. 103, Parque Industrial
TEL: 1-(425)821-3906 FAX: 1-(425)821-3228 FINSA, C.P. 66636 Apodaca, N.L., MÉXICO
Canada TEL: 52(01-81) 8398-8227/8228/8242/8244
FAX: 52(01-81) 8398-8226
Mitutoyo Canada Inc.
2121 Meadowvale Blvd., Mississauga, Tijuana Office / M³ Solution Center
Ont. L5N 5N1., CANADA Calle José María Velazco 10501-C, Col. Cd. Industrial
TEL:1-(905)821-1261 FAX:1-(905)821-4968 Nueva Tijuana, C.P. 22500 Tijuana, B.C., MÉXICO
TEL: 52 (01-664) 647-5024
Montreal Office
7075 Place Robert-Joncas Suite 129, Montreal, Querétaro Office / M³ Solution Center
Quebec H4M 2Z2, CANADA Av. Cerro Blanco No.500-1, Colonia Centro Sur,
TEL:1-(514)337-5994 FAX:1-(514)337-4498 Querétaro, Querétaro, C.P. 76090, MÉXICO
TEL: 52 (01-442) 340-8018, 340-8019 and 340-8020
Brazil FAX: 52 (01-442) 340-8017
Mitutoyo Sul Americana Ltda. Mitutoyo Mexicana, S.A. de C.V. Querétaro
Head office / M³ Solution Center Calibration Laboratory
Avenida Mimes nº 25 – Loteamento Multivias II, Av. Cerro Blanco 500 30 Centro Sur,
Jardim Ermida I, CEP 13212-216 Jundiaí - SP, Querétaro, Querétaro, C.P. 76090, MÉXICO
BRASIL TEL: 52 (01-442) 340-8018, 340-8019 and 340-8020
TEL: 55 (11) 5643-0004/0041 FAX: 52 (01-442) 340-8017
Filial Curitiba / M³ Solution Center Aguascalientes Office / M³ Solution Center
Rua Sergipe, nº 101, Sala A, Bairro Boneca Av. Aguascalientes No. 622, Local 15 Centro Comer-
do Iguaçu, São José dos Pinhais – Paraná – cial El Cilindro Fracc. Pulgas Pandas Norte, C.P.
BRASIL CEP 83040120 20138, Aguascalientes, Ags. MÉXICO
TEL: 55 (41) 3534-1728 TEL: 52 (01-449) 174-4140 and 174-4143

Argentina Irapuato Office / M³ Solution Center


Boulevard a Villas de Irapuato No. 1460 L.1 Col. Ejido
Mitutoyo Sul Americana Ltda.
Irapuato C.P. 36643
Argentina Branch / M³ Solution Center
Irapuato, Gto., MÉXICO
Av. B. Mitre 891/899 – C.P. (B1603CQI)
Vicente López –Pcia. Buenos Aires – ARGENTINA TEL: 52 (01-462) 144-1200 and 144-1400
TEL:54 (11) 4730-1433 FAX:54 (11) 4730-1411
Sucursal Cordoba / M³ Solution Center
Av. Ricchieri 2872 L.4 – Bº Jardin – CP X5014O-
PJ Cordoba, ARGENTINA
TEL:54 (351) 464-4125

App-6
No. 99MBC150A
Revision Record

Date of publication Revision status Details of revision


June 1, 2023 First edition Publication

No. 99MBC150A
Mitutoyo Corporation
20-1, Sakado 1-Chome, Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 213-8533, Japan
Tel: +81 (0)44 813-8230 Fax: +81 (0)44 813-8231
Home page: https://www.mitutoyo.co.jp/global.html

For the EU Directive, Authorized representative and importer in the EU:


Mitutoyo Europe GmbH
Borsigstrasse 8-10, 41469 Neuss, Germany

For the UK Regulation, Authorized representative and importer in the UK:


Mitutoyo (UK) Ltd.
Joule Road, West Point Business Park, Andover, Hampshire SP10 3UX, UNITED KINGDOM

Printed in Japan
No. 99MBC150A

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy